Download Profile XP System Guide

Transcript
Profile XP
PVS SERIES MEDIA PLATFORMS
System Guide
SOFTWARE VERSION 5.4
071-8289-02
MAY 2005
the mos t watched worldwide
Copyright
Copyright © 2005 Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in
the United States of America.
This document may not be copied in whole or in part, or otherwise reproduced except as
specifically permitted under U.S. copyright law, without the prior written consent of Thomson
Broadcast and Media Solutions, Inc., P.O. Box 59900, Nevada City, California 95959-7900
Trademarks
Grass Valley, Profile, and Profile XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Other trademarks used in this document are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the
manufacturers or vendors of the associated products. Thomson Broadcast and Media
Solutions, Inc. products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending.
Additional information regarding Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions, Inc. trademarks
and other proprietary rights may be found at www.thomsongrassvalley.com.
Disclaimer
Product options and specifications subject to change without notice. The information in this
manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should
not be construed as a commitment by Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions, Inc. Thomson
Broadcast and Media Solutions, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or
inaccuracies that may appear in this publication.
U.S. Government
Restricted Rights
Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set
forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause
at DFARS 252.277-7013 or in subparagraph c(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer
Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. Manufacturer is Thomson
Broadcast and Media Solutions, Inc., P.O. Box 59900, Nevada City, California 95959-7900
U.S.A.
Revision Status
2
Rev Date
Description
December 1, 1999
Initial release of the Profile XP System Guide 071-0624-00A
December 6, 1999
Updated to include version 4.0.1 features 071-0624-01
July 21, 2000
Updated for high definition features in v. 4.1 — 071-8048-00
November 17,
2000
Updated to include support for 73 GB RAID drives — 071-8048-01
January 17, 2001
Supports new system processor board connections. 071-8048-02
July 13, 2001
Updated to support version 5.0. 071-8112-00
June 17, 2002
Updated to include additional RAID systems and new disk utility.
071-8112-01
September 19,
2002
Updated to support version 5.1 Profile XP system software release.
071-8194-00
July 21, 2003
Updated to support version 5.2 Profile XP system software release.
071-8248-00
February 23, 2004
Updated to support version 5.4 Profile XP system software release,
PVS3000, PVS 3500, Long GoP on Video Processor board, new
Fibre Channel Disk II board, Agile Output option, PFR600 and
PFR700 Fibre Channel RAID storage. 071-8289-00
23 July 2004
New video standard procedures.
13 May 2005
Removed SDTI information.
13 May 2005
Contents
Preface
About this manual.................................................................................................................9
Using the Profile XP Documentation Set .........................................................................9
Manual Descriptions ......................................................................................................10
How this manual is organized........................................................................................11
Getting more information ....................................................................................................12
Grass Valley Product Support ............................................................................................13
Safety Summaries
General Safety Summary ...................................................................................................15
Safety Terms and Symbols ................................................................................................16
Service Safety Summary ....................................................................................................17
Certifications and Compliances ..........................................................................................17
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
Profile XP Media Platform features ....................................................................................19
About channels and factory default configuration..........................................................26
Video compression for standard definition ....................................................................27
Video compression for high definition............................................................................27
Fibre Channel RAID storage .........................................................................................28
Fibre Channel and/or Ethernet IP Video Networks........................................................28
Front panel controls and indicators ....................................................................................29
Rear Panel View.................................................................................................................32
Standard accessories.........................................................................................................33
Profile XP Media Platform system overview.......................................................................34
High level block diagram ...............................................................................................34
Board level block diagram .............................................................................................35
Starting the Profile XP system............................................................................................43
Logging on Windows NT ....................................................................................................44
Automatic Logon............................................................................................................44
Logging on as Administrator..........................................................................................44
Logging on as Profile .....................................................................................................45
Shutting down the Profile XP system .................................................................................46
Chapter 2
Working with Configuration Manager
Tour of Configuration Manager ..........................................................................................48
File System ....................................................................................................................48
Network .........................................................................................................................49
Video setup items ..........................................................................................................50
Audio setup items ..........................................................................................................51
License Configuration ....................................................................................................52
Channel Configuration...................................................................................................53
Viewing hardware settings summary dialog boxes........................................................54
Viewing board location information ....................................................................................56
Saving and restoring your system settings.........................................................................57
Saving a copy of your system configuration ..................................................................57
Opening saved configuration files .................................................................................58
Importing system settings...................................................................................................59
Importing a configuration ...............................................................................................60
Remote configuration .........................................................................................................62
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
3
Contents
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
RAID chassis product descriptions .................................................................................... 66
PFC500 product description.......................................................................................... 66
PFR500 product description.......................................................................................... 66
PFR600 product description.......................................................................................... 67
PFR700 product description.......................................................................................... 68
Estimating storage capacity ...............................................................................................69
Determining maximum video data rate per channel........................................................... 70
Connecting RAID chassis cabling ......................................................................................70
Configuring RAID storage using GVG Disk Utility .............................................................. 71
About configuring storage ............................................................................................. 72
Introducing the GVG Disk Utility .................................................................................... 75
Binding disks and creating a video file system .............................................................. 77
Configuring hot spare drives ......................................................................................... 83
Changing the video file system volume name ............................................................... 85
Expanding storage ........................................................................................................ 87
Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration ..............................................................................91
Performing RAID storage maintenance
using GVG Disk Utility ................................................................................................... 93
System reboot procedure .............................................................................................. 94
Checking RAID controller microcode version ................................................................ 95
Loading RAID controller microcode: All models ............................................................ 96
Identifying disk modules prior to removal ......................................................................98
Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks .....................................................................100
Performing PFR600 maintenance tasks .....................................................................107
Performing PFR700 maintenance tasks .....................................................................113
Resetting the PFC500 system clock ...........................................................................117
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
Using the Channel Configuration dialog box ....................................................................119
Displaying the Channel Configuration dialog box........................................................120
Working with channels ................................................................................................121
Default settings for channels you add .........................................................................121
Why resources appear dimmed, red, or in use ...........................................................122
Using Tool Tips to manage resources.........................................................................123
Using the Warning symbol to find shared resources ...................................................124
Using the Summary button to review channel settings ...............................................125
Adding and configuring a new channel ............................................................................126
To add a channel.........................................................................................................126
Entering channel name and description ......................................................................126
Selecting the channel type ..........................................................................................128
Selecting video quality and crosspoints ......................................................................130
Setting the SD MPEG recorder aspect ratio................................................................135
Selecting playout aspect ratio conversion ...................................................................136
Selecting audio channels for each audio track ............................................................139
Selecting timecode I/O for each timecode track..........................................................140
Removing a channel ........................................................................................................141
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Adjusting video output timing ...........................................................................................143
Adjusting playout timing to match zero time ................................................................144
Adjusting playout timing to match E to E timing ..........................................................146
Adjusting system reference timing to offset all playout timing .....................................148
Recording synchronous and asynchronous feeds ...........................................................150
Changing the system video standard ...............................................................................151
Configuring the video codec type .....................................................................................153
Selecting the video I/Os used by a channel .....................................................................155
4
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Contents
Selecting video quality for a channel................................................................................156
Guidelines for selecting Video Quality Presets............................................................156
Selecting video quality settings for a channel..............................................................158
Selecting browse video quality settings for a channel .................................................160
Defining and selecting a custom video quality preset..................................................162
Recording VBI information uncompressed .......................................................................163
Selecting the video still-play mode ...................................................................................167
Viewing video input status................................................................................................168
Modifying video input settings ..........................................................................................169
Setting up the VITC reader ..........................................................................................169
Erasing video input VBI information ............................................................................171
Selecting freeze or black upon video input loss ..........................................................173
Modifying video output settings ........................................................................................174
Setting up the VITC generator .....................................................................................174
Erasing video output VBI information ..........................................................................176
Ancillary Data insertion ................................................................................................177
Selecting freeze or black for video output signal loss..................................................179
Erasing the horizontal blanking interval.......................................................................180
Renaming video I/Os in crosspoint lists ...........................................................................181
Renaming the video inputs ..........................................................................................181
Renaming the video outputs........................................................................................182
Configuring the video monitor output ...............................................................................183
Enabling or disabling dither on the Video Monitor output ............................................183
Enabling or disabling NTSC pedestal ..........................................................................184
Configuring Text Overlay on the Video Monitor output................................................185
Enabling Video Monitor timecode burn-in....................................................................186
Using multiple video tracks for one channel.....................................................................188
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
About Profile XP Audio .....................................................................................................191
Determining the number of audio channels available..................................................191
Determining the audio formats available .....................................................................192
Adding or removing audio tracks......................................................................................193
Removing audio tracks ................................................................................................193
Adding audio tracks .....................................................................................................194
Selecting audio channels for an audio track.....................................................................196
Changing the audio I/O format .........................................................................................197
Select audio input format .............................................................................................197
Select audio output format...........................................................................................199
Checking AES/EBU input status ......................................................................................201
Selecting incoming digital audio coding format ................................................................202
Adjusting audio delay .......................................................................................................203
Selecting audio delay presets......................................................................................203
Selecting custom audio delay ......................................................................................204
Adjusting analog audio input level....................................................................................205
Adjusting analog audio output level..................................................................................206
Muting analog audio outputs ............................................................................................207
Selecting analog audio output line mode .........................................................................208
Selecting audio reference level ........................................................................................209
Changing how audio sounds during jog ...........................................................................210
Chapter 7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
About Profile XP series timecode .....................................................................................211
Using the internal timecode generators............................................................................212
Selecting the internal generator as a timecode source ...............................................212
Using the same TC generator for multiple channels ...................................................213
Setting up an internal timecode generator...................................................................215
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
5
Contents
Recording VITC................................................................................................................217
Selecting a VITC input for a channel...........................................................................217
Recording timecode from ancillary data ......................................................................218
Setting up the VITC reader on a Video Input ..............................................................219
Setting up the VITC reader on the Reference Input ....................................................221
Generating VITC on a video output..................................................................................223
Selecting the video output as a timecode output for the channel................................223
Setting up the VITC generator on a video output ........................................................225
Deleting unwanted VITC and other VBI signals ...............................................................226
Recording or generating LTC...........................................................................................228
Select a timecode source for timecode burn-in ................................................................229
Chapter 8
Modifying a Channel: Ancillary Data
About Profile XP series ancillary data ..............................................................................231
Adding an ancillary data track ..........................................................................................232
Selecting the video I/Os used for ancillary data ...............................................................233
Removing an ancillary data track .....................................................................................235
Chapter 9
Managing Optional Licenses
Enabling optional features................................................................................................237
Requesting a license ........................................................................................................238
Adding a license ...............................................................................................................242
Deleting licenses ..............................................................................................................243
Archiving licenses ............................................................................................................243
Chapter 10
Controlling the Profile XP Remotely
Setting up RS-422 remote control in VdrPanel ................................................................246
Setting up RS-422 remote control using Prolink ..............................................................249
How to set up Prolink ..................................................................................................249
Overview of the Prolink communications window .......................................................250
Running PortServer to enable remote operation..............................................................251
Setting up AMP remote control ........................................................................................252
Configuring AMP protocol control................................................................................252
Using the AMP application for local control......................................................................254
Setting Options............................................................................................................255
Loading a clip ..............................................................................................................256
Playing a clip ...............................................................................................................256
Recording a clip...........................................................................................................256
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
About Profile Networking..................................................................................................257
About Windows NT networking ...................................................................................257
About the Fibre Channel video network option ...........................................................258
About the Ethernet video network option ....................................................................261
Simple Networks .........................................................................................................263
Profile XP systems with both video network options installed .....................................263
Setting up a simple Windows NT network........................................................................264
Set machine name and IP address on each Profile XP system ..................................264
Power-off and connect proper cabling.........................................................................266
Power-on the hub or switch and configure if necessary ..............................................267
Power-on and test each Profile XP system on the network ........................................267
Setting up a simple video network: Fibre Channel ...........................................................268
Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network ..................................................................268
Configure Fibre Channel network settings on each Profile XP ...................................269
Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP ..........................................................270
Power-down and connect proper Fibre Channel cabling ............................................272
Power-on the switch and configure if necessary .........................................................273
6
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Contents
Test the Fibre Channel network using Media Manager ...............................................273
Setting up a simple video network: Ethernet ....................................................................277
Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network...................................................................277
Configure the video network on each Profile XP: Ethernet .........................................277
Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP...........................................................279
Power-off and connect proper Ethernet cabling ..........................................................281
Power-on the hub or switch and configure if necessary ..............................................282
Test the Ethernet video network using Media Manager ..............................................282
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
Summary of setup problems ............................................................................................287
Common record/play problems ........................................................................................288
Problems with video .........................................................................................................289
Problems with audio .........................................................................................................290
Problems with timecode ...................................................................................................292
VITC Record ................................................................................................................292
Storage system problems.................................................................................................294
Problems using Configuration Manager ...........................................................................295
Channel control problems ................................................................................................296
Common Ethernet network problems...............................................................................297
Common Fibre Channel video network problems ............................................................298
Testing the Fibre Channel Video network ...................................................................299
Common Ethernet video network problems .....................................................................303
Testing the Ethernet Video network ............................................................................304
Appendix A
Electrical and Environmental Specifications
General Information..........................................................................................................309
Test Equipment ................................................................................................................309
Electrical Specifications....................................................................................................310
Profile XP System Power Specifications ..........................................................................315
PAC 216 Power Requirements ........................................................................................315
Environmental Criteria ......................................................................................................316
Appendix B
Connector Pin-outs
S-VGA connector .............................................................................................................317
RJ-45 Ethernet connector ................................................................................................318
Parallel Port connector .....................................................................................................319
RS-232 connectors...........................................................................................................320
I/O Panel RS-422 connectors...........................................................................................321
I/O Panel GPI connectors.................................................................................................322
GPI Input connector (on I/O Panel) .............................................................................322
GPI output connector (on I/O Panel) ...........................................................................323
I/O Panel LTC connectors ................................................................................................324
Fibre Channel Disk board connectors ..............................................................................325
Fibre Channel Cable Specifications ............................................................................325
Fibre Channel Network board connector..........................................................................326
Audio board connector .....................................................................................................327
Appendix C
Rack Mounting Information and
Rear Panel Drawings
Rack mounting the Profile XP ..........................................................................................329
Chassis dimensions for Profile XP and peripheral equipment.....................................330
Rack mount hardware shipped with the Profile XP system .........................................331
Rack mounting Fibre Channel RAID systems .............................................................331
Mounting the Rack Slides............................................................................................332
Installing the Profile XP on the rack mount rails ..........................................................334
Making Rack Slide Adjustments ..................................................................................334
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
7
Contents
Mounting Panels and Audio Chassis...........................................................................335
Rear Panel Drawings .......................................................................................................336
Profile XP Media Platform Chassis .............................................................................336
XLR216 and BNC216 AES/EBU Breakout Panels .....................................................336
PAC216 Profile Audio Chassis....................................................................................337
I/O Panel .....................................................................................................................337
PFC500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis ........................................................................338
PFC500E Expansion Chassis .....................................................................................338
PFR500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis ........................................................................339
PFR500E Expansion Chassis .....................................................................................339
PFR600 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis ........................................................................340
PFR600E Expansion Chassis .....................................................................................340
PFR700 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis ........................................................................341
PFR700E Expansion Chassis .....................................................................................341
Index
8
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Preface
About this manual
This Profile XP System Guide describes the features of the Profile XP Media Platform
and presents step-by-step procedures for modifying system settings to meet the specific
needs of our system. This manual assumes you have already installed your Profile XP
system using the Installation Guide shipped with your unit.
Using the Profile XP Documentation Set
This manual is part of a full set of support documentation for the Profile XP Media
Platform. The following illustrates how to use the Profile XP documentation depending
on the task you are performing.
yG
roup
F
am
il
y
am
of
il
y
s
er
ie
s
XP
file l
ProManua
ie
alle
S
er
ss V
P
Gra
X
XP
file l
ProManua
s
roup
ie
yG
S
er
alle
P
ss V
of
Gra
F
XP
file l
ProManua
X
roup
S
yG
P
alle
of
ss V
X
S
er
ie
X
P
Gra
F
am
il
y
of
ie
S
er
XP
file l
ProManua
s
roup
P
ss
yG
F
am
il
y
of
Gra
le
Val
X
G
ra
P
r
M of
F an ile
am
u X
il a P
y l
ss
s
V
al
le
y
G
ro
u
p
Path for the Installer
Release Notes
Installation Guide
Contains the latest
information about Profile XP
hardware and software
shipped with your system.
Contains the product description
Contains essential steps for
and step-by-step instructions for
installing your Profile XP
modifying system settings.
system with local storage,
using factory default settings.
System Guide
Use alternate procedures
for shared storage option.
roup
er
ie
s
XP
file l
ProManua
S
yG
P
alle
X
ss V
These manuals include:
- PFC500 Instruction Manual
- PFR500 Instruction Manual
- PFR600 Instruction Manual
- PFR700 Instruction Manual
- Profile XP Service Manual
S
er
ie
X
P
of
G
ra
P
r
M of
F a n ile
am
u X
il a P
y l
ss
s
V
al
le
y
G
ro
F
u
am
p
il
y
of
Gra
Other Manuals
Open SAN
Instruction Manual and Release Notes
Contains instructions for installing storage
that is shared by multiple Profile XP systems.
Installers consult
the User Manuals
as needed.
p
Path for the Operator
s
ie
er
S
P
of
il
y
am
F
s
S
er
ie
X
P
of
P
r
M of
F an ile
am
u X
il a P
y l
XP
file l
ProManua
X
u
ro
G
y
le
al
V
ss
ra
G
roup
yG
alle
ss V
Gra
Release Notes
User Manuals
Contains the latest
information about Profile XP
hardware and software
shipped with your system.
Contains complete instructions for using
Profile applications. These manuals include:
- Profile XP User Manual
- Other user manuals you received with
optional Profile applications.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
9
Preface
Manual Descriptions
• Installation Guide (for your Profile XP Model) Provides step-by-step instructions
for installing the Profile XP Media Platform using factory default settings for all
record/play channels. Factory default settings are indicated within the guide. After
installing the Profile XP system using this installation guide, you can refer to this
Profile XP System Guide to customize system settings for your installation.
• Profile XP User Manual Contains complete instructions for using Profile
applications to operate the Profile XP Media Platform.
• Profile XP Service Manual Contains information for servicing the Profile XP
Media Platform and monitoring systems using NetCentral II Lite. Procedures are
included for following tasks:
- Setting up and using NetCentral to monitor and diagnose problems on local and
remote Profile XP systems.
- Problem analysis using symptom, possible problem, solution tables.
- Running diagnostics
- Replacing field replaceable units.
• NetCentral User Guide Contains information for using NetCentral to monitor
various types of broadcast equipment, including Profile XP systems, from a central
monitoring station.
• Profile XP Release Notes Contains the latest information about the Profile
hardware and the software release shipped on your system. This information
includes software specifications and requirements, feature changes from the
previous releases, helpful system administrative information, and any known
problems.
• PFC500 Instruction Manual Contains information for servicing the PFC500 Fibre
Channel RAID Chassis including step-by-step procedures for replacing field
replaceable units.
• PFR500 Instruction Manual Contains information for servicing the PFR500 Fibre
Channel RAID Chassis including step-by-step procedures for replacing field
replaceable units.
• PFR600 Instruction Manual Contains information for servicing the PFR600 Fibre
Channel RAID Chassis including step-by-step procedures for replacing field
replaceable units.
• PFR700 Instruction Manual Contains information for servicing the PFR700 Fibre
Channel RAID Chassis including step-by-step procedures for replacing field
replaceable units.
• Open SAN Instruction Manual Contains instructions for installing storage that is
shared by multiple Profile XP systems.
10
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
How this manual is organized
How this manual is organized
The Profile XP System Guide is organized around the tasks you’ll be performing to
customize the Profile XP settings to meet your system needs. You can see this reflected
in the chapter titles chosen for this manual. The following identifies and describes the
chapters included in this manual:
Chapter 1 - Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
Introduces the Profile XP Media Platform. You can read this chapter to get familiar with
the Profile XP key features and system components. Also included is a brief architectural
overview of the Profile XP system.
Chapter 2 - Working with Configuration Manager
Describes the Configuration Manager user interface and functionality. Configuration
Manager is the application used to configure and manage the Profile XP system.
Chapter 3 - Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Describes how to set up local storage for the Profile XP Media Platform. Procedures are
included for configurations with PFC500, PFR500, PFR600, and PFR700 Fibre
Channel RAID Chassis and expansion chassis, and for storage systems with the optional
second controller board.
Chapter 4 - Adding or Removing Channels
Describes the basics of adding, configuring, or removing channels. Information on
advanced channel settings are referenced to chapters 5 through 7.
Chapter 5 - Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Describes how to modify the video settings for a channel.
Chapter 6 - Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
Describes how to modify the audio settings for a channel.
Chapter 7 - Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
Describes how to modify the timecode settings for a channel.
Chapter 8 - Modifying a Channel: Ancillary Data
Describes how to modify the ancillary data settings for a channel.
Chapter 9 - Managing Optional Licenses
Describes how to request and add optional software licenses to enable features such as
the Agile Output.
Chapter 10 - Controlling the Profile XP Remotely
Describes how to set up the Profile XP Media Platform for the control mode you want
to use: remote control protocol over RS-422 or remote applications over Ethernet.
Chapter 11 - Setting up a Simple Network
Describes how to set up a simple network of Profile XP systems. Procedures are
included for setting up the Windows NT network and both Profile XP video network
options.
Chapter 12 - Solving Common Setup Problems
Provides help for solving common set up problems that occur when Profile XP features
or signal requirements are not understood.
Appendix A - Electrical and Environmental Specifications
This appendix consists of electrical and environmental specifications.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
11
Preface
Appendix B - Connector Pin-outs
This appendix identifies connectors and the signals present on the pins of those
connectors.
Appendix C - Rack Mounting Information and Rear Panel Drawings
This appendix provides rack mounting information for the Profile XP system and
peripheral equipment. Also provided are rear panel illustrations for the Profile XP and
peripheral equipment.
Getting more information
In addition to printed documents, Profile XP product information is available in on-line
manuals and the Profile XP help system. Use these as additional sources for information.
On-line manuals
Electronic versions of the following manuals are located on the system drive of your
Profile XP Media Platform and on the Profile XP software CD-ROM.
• Installation Guide (for your model)
• Profile XP System Guide
• Profile XP User Manual
• Profile XP Release Notes
• Profile XP Service Manual
• NetCentral User Guide
• PFC 500 Instruction Manual
• PFR 500 Instruction Manual
• PFR 600 Instruction Manual
• PFR 700 Instruction Manual
You can view these manuals using Adobe Acrobat Reader which is also pre-installed on
your Profile XP system.
On-line Help
Contains all the information in the Profile XP System Guide, optimized for use on-line.
You can access on-line help by choosing the Help menu, or by clicking the Help button
in a dialog box.
12
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Grass Valley Product Support
Grass Valley Product Support
To get technical assistance, check on the status of problems, or report new problems,
contact Grass Valley Product Support via e-mail, the Web, or by phone or fax.
Web Technical Support
To access support information on the Web, visit the product support Web page on the
Grass Valley Web site. You can download software or find solutions to problems by
searching our Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) database.
World Wide Web: http://www.thomsongrassvalley.com/support/
Technical Support E-mail Address: [email protected].
Phone Support
Use the following information to contact product support by phone during business
hours. Afterhours phone support is available for warranty and contract customers.
United States
(800) 547-8949 (Toll Free)
France
+33 (1) 34 20 77 77
Latin America
(800) 547-8949 (Toll Free)
Germany
+49 6155 870 606
Eastern Europe
+49 6155 870 606
Greece
+33 (1) 34 20 77 77
Southern Europe
+33 (1) 34 20 77 77
Hong Kong
+852 2531 3058
Middle East
+33 (1) 34 20 77 77
Italy
+39 06 8720351
Australia
+61 3 9721 3737
Netherlands
+31 35 6238421
Belgium
+32 2 3349031
Poland
+49 6155 870 606
Brazil
+55 11 5509 3440
Russia
+49 6155 870 606
Canada
(800) 547-8949 (Toll Free)
Singapore
+656379 1390
China
+86 106615 9450
Spain
+ 34 91 512 03 50
Denmark
+45 45968800
Sweden
+46 87680705
Dubai
+ 971 4 299 64 40
Switzerland
+41 (1) 487 80 02
Finland
+35 9 68284600
UK
+44 870 903 2022
Authorized Support Representative
A local authorized support representative may be available in your country. To locate
the support representative for your country, visit the product support Web page on the
Grass Valley Web site.
Profile Users Group
You can connect with other Profile XP Media Platform users to ask questions or share
advice, tips, and hints. Send e-mail to [email protected] to join the community
and benefit from the experience of others.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
13
Preface
14
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Safety Summaries
General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage
to this product or any products connected to it.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
While using this product, you may need to access other parts of the system.
Read the General Safety summary in other system manuals for warnings and
cautions related to operating the system.
Injury Precautions
Use Proper Power
Cord
Ground the Product
Do Not Operate
Without Covers
Do Not operate in
Wet/Damp
Conditions
Do Not Operate in an
Explosive
Atmosphere
Avoid Exposed
Circuitry
13 May 2005
To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this product.
This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power
cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be connected
to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output terminals
of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.
To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product with
covers or panels removed.
To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product in wet or damp
conditions.
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an explosive
atmosphere.
To avoid injury, remove jewelry such as rings, watches, and other metallic
objects. Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is
present.
Profile XP System Guide
15
Safety Summaries
Product Damage Precautions
Use Proper Power
Source
Provide Proper
Ventilation
Do Not Operate With
Suspected Failures
Battery
Replacement
Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the
voltage specified.
To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation.
If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified
service personnel.
To avoid damage, replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the circuit board manufacturer. Dispose of used battery
according to the circuit board manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety Terms and Symbols
Terms in This
Manual
These terms may appear in this manual:
!
WARNING: Warning statements identify conditions or practices that can
result in personal injury or loss of life.
!
CAUTION: Caution statements identify conditions or practices that can
result in damage to the equipment or other property.
Terms on the
Product
These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately accessible as one
reads the marking.
WARNING indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately accessible
as you read the marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the
Product
The following symbols may appear on the product:
DANGER high voltage
Protective ground (earth) terminal
!
16
Profile XP System Guide
ATTENTION – refer to manual
13 May 2005
Service Safety Summary
Do Not Service
Alone
Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this product unless another
person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present.
Disconnect Power
To avoid electric shock, disconnect the main power by means of the power
cord or, if provided, the power switch.
Use Care When
Servicing With
Power On
Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product. Disconnect power
and remove battery (if applicable) before removing protective panels,
soldering, or replacing components.
To avoid electric shock, do not touch exposed connections
Certifications and Compliances
Canadian Certified
Power Cords
Canadian approval includes the products and power cords appropriate for
use in the North America power network. All other power cords supplied are
approved for the country of use.
FCC Emission
Control
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Changes
or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson Broadcast and Media
Solutions Inc. can affect emission compliance and could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.
Canadian EMC
Notice of
Compliance
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference
Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques
dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A
préscrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le
ministère des Communications du Canada.
Canadian Certified
AC Adapter
Canadian approval includes the AC adapters appropriate for use in the
North America power network. All other AC adapters supplied are
approved for the country of use.
EN55022 Class A
Warning
For products that comply with Class A. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
17
Safety Summaries
Laser Compliance
Laser Safety
Requirements
The device used in this product is a Class 1 certified laser product. Operating
this product outside specifications or altering its original design may result
in hazardous radiation exposure, and may be considered an act of modifying
or new manufacturing of a laser product under U.S. regulations contained in
21CFR Chapter 1, subchapter J or CENELEC regulations in HD 482 S1.
People performing such an act are required by law to recertify and reidentify
this product in accordance with provisions of 21CFR subchapter J for
distribution within the U.S.A., and in accordance with CENELEC HD 482
S1 for distribution within countries using the IEC 825 standard.
Laser Safety
Laser safety in the United States is regulated by the Center for Devices and
Radiological Health (CDRH). The laser safety regulations are published in
the “Laser Product Performance Standard,” Code of Federal Regulation
(CFR), Title 21, Subchapter J.
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Standard 825,
“Radiation of Laser Products, Equipment Classification, Requirements and
User’s Guide,” governs laser products outside the United States. Europe and
member nations of the European Free Trade Association fall under the
jurisdiction of the Comité Européen de Normalization Electrotechnique
(CENELEC).
FCC Emission
Limits
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesirable operation.
Certification
Category
Standard
Safety
Designed/tested for compliance with:
UL1950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including Electrical Business
Equipment (Third Edition, 1995)
IEC 950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including Electrical Business
Equipment (Second edition, 1991)
CAN/CSA C22.2, No. 950-95 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment,
including Electrical Business Equipment
EN60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including Electrical Business
Equipment
18
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
1
Introducing the Profile XP Media
Platform
The Profile XP Media Platform provides a multi-channel, high bandwidth platform for
the storage and manipulation of video and audio in professional applications. The
Profile XP Media Platform has a wide range of capabilities, from a stand alone digital
disk recorder to being part of a large network of video servers. The Profile XP Media
Platform can be used in a wide variety of applications including spot insertion, program
delay, store and forward, and multi-channel replay.
Profile XP Media Platform features
Encoders and decoders in the PVS1000 models process standard definition MPEG-2
video, while encoders and decoders in the PVS2000 models process high definition
MPEG-2 video.
The PVS1100 Series uses video codecs to process video. You can configure each of the
codecs to encode and decode video using the DVCAM, DVCPRO or MPEG-2
compression standards. The PVS1100 Series processes video using DVCAM,
DVCPRO 25, and MPEG-2 at bits rates up to 25 Mb/s. The 50 Mb/s software option
allows you to process video using DVCPRO 50, and MPEG-2 at bit rates up to 50 Mb/s,
including the D10 format at 30, 40, or 50 Mb/s. You to play clips of any of these
compression types through any codec without any configuration changes. For example,
a DVCPRO 50 can immediately follow an MPEG-2 clip at 12 Mb/s on any playout
channel. The only limitation is that you cannot create or play master clips (complex
movies) that include more than one compression type.
The PVS3000 Series combines both standard and high definition capabilities in a single
Profile XP Media Platform. You can record and play SD clips in all the
PVS1100-supported formats on your SD channels, and concurrently record and play HD
clips in all the PVS2000-supported formats on your HD channels.
The PVS3500 Series extends these capabilities to allow you to play both SD and HD
MPEG-2 4:2:0 clips through an HD decoder. You can play both 1080i and 720p HD clips
through the same decoder. Clips are played out in the format specified for the output
assigned to the channel, but all HD outputs on a system must be set to the same standard
(1080i or 720p). The decoder can play out on either a standard definition output or a high
definition output.
All clips are either up- or down-converted appropriately to play on that output, and their
aspect ratios are adjusted according to your custom settings. As with the PVS1100, you
cannot create or play master clips (complex movies) that include both standard and high
definition material.
This definition-independent software option (Agile Output) can be installed on a
PVS2000 or a PVS3000, although up- or down-conversion is dependent on your output
hardware. For example, your PVS2000 cannot down-convert HD material without
adding standard definition output cards.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
19
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
All inputs, both standard and high definition, can record ancillary data. When you play
these clips, the ancillary data is inserted on the specified lines. If your chosen output does
not support as much ancillary data as was recorded on each line, the data is truncated at
the maximum for that output. This occurs, for example, when you play HD clips on an
SD output.
20
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Profile XP Media Platform features
Features common to all media platforms
• 16 (8 AES Pairs)/ 32 (16 AES pairs) channel audio - AES/EBU, embedded or
analog uncompressed audio, Dolby E and AC-3 compressed audio
• 600 Mb/s System Bandwidth
• Redundant power supply, Windows NT system disk, cooling fans for reliability
• Fibre Channel attached high performance RAID storage
• Storage capability supported includes distributed storage for hundreds of channels
as well as centralized storage for up to 64 channels
• NetCentral™ provides remote error reporting and monitoring via SNMP
• High speed Fibre Channel networking up to 250 Mb/s
• 100BaseT Ethernet networking up to 30 Mb/s
• Remote control including:
- Remote Applications over Ethernet
- RS-422 control protocol including AMP, VDCP, Odetics, BVW, or Profile
protocols.
- GPI Trigger (8 I/O)
PVS1000 features include:
• Up to 8 standard definition (SD) channels of broadcast-quality video
PVS1000 Series channel configurations by model
a.
Model
Number
Number of MPEG
Encoder Boardsa
Number of MPEG
Decoder Boards
Channel
Configuration
PVS1022
1
1
2 in/2 out
PVS1024
1
2
2 in/ 4 out
PVS1026
1
3
2 in/6 out
PVS1042
2
1
4 in/2 out
PVS1044
2
2
4 in/4 out
PVS1062
3
1
6 in/2 out
PVS1002
0
1
0 in/2 out
PVS1004
0
2
0 in/4 out
PVS1006
0
6
0 in/6 out
PVS1008
0
4
0 in/8 out
MPEG Encoder and Decoder boards in PVS1000 series are Standard
Definition.
• MPEG-2 4:2:2 @ Main Level from 4-50 Mb/s, long GoP (for SD)
• SMPTE 259M, 270MB Serial Digital I/O (Analog monitor optional)
• 525/60 or 625/50 operation: accepts NTSC, PAL
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
21
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
PVS1100 features include:
• Up to 8 standard definition (SD) channels of broadcast-quality video
PVS1100 Series channel configurations by model
Model
Number
Number of video
codecs
Channel
Configuration
PVS1102
2
2 play/record
PVS1104
4
4 play/record
PVS1106
6
6 play/record
PVS1108
8
8 play/record
• DVCAM video compression
• DVCPRO 25 video compression
• DVCPRO 50 video compression with 50 Mb/s option
• MPEG-2 4:2:0 @ Main Level from 4 to 15 Mb/s, long GoP
• MPEG-2 4:2:2 @ Main Level from 4-25 Mb/s, long GoP or up to 50 Mb/s with
50 Mb/s option
• MPEG-D10 I-frame at 30, 40, or 50 Mb/s CBG (requires 50 Mb/s option)
• Back-to-back playout of all formats on any codec
• New real-time processor board with improved processing capacity — provides
greater bandwidth for fibre channel transfers, concurrent channel operations, etc.
• 525/60 or 625/50 operation: accepts NTSC, PAL
22
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Profile XP Media Platform features
PVS2000 features include:
• Up to 4 high definition (HD) channels of broadcast-quality video
PVS2000 Series channel configurations by model
Model
Number
Number of HD
Encoder Boards
Number of HD
Decoder Boards
Channel
Configuration
PVS2002
0
1
0 in/2 out
PVS2004
0
2
0 in/4 out
PVS2012
1
1
1 in/2 out
PVS2013
1
2
1 in/ 3 out
PVS2022
2
2
2 in/2 out
• MPEG-2 4:2:0 @ Main Level from 20-80 Mb/s, long GoP (for HD)
• HD: SMPTE 292M, 1.485 Gbs Serial Digital I/O (includes downconverted SD SDI
and composite analog monitor with text overlay and timecode burn-in)
• Up-conversion of MPEG-2 4:2:0 clips with aspect ratio configuration (requires
Definition Independent option)
• 1080i and 720p line rates for HD, 50, 59.94, and 60 fps, accepts house black and
tri-level sync reference
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
23
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
PVS3000 features include:
• Up to 3 high definition (HD) channels of broadcast-quality video
• Up to 4 standard definition (SD) channels of broadcast-quality video
PVS3000 Series channel configurations by model
Model
Number
Number of SD
video codecs
Number of HD
MPEG Encoders
Number of HD
MPEG Decoders
SD Channel
Configuration
HD Channel
Configuration
PVS3004
2
0
2
2 play/record, or
1 in/1 out
0 in/2 out
PVS3014
2
1
2
2 play/record, or
1 in/1 out
1 in/2 out
PVS3024
4
0
2
2 play/record, or
2 in/2 out
0 in/2 out
PVS3034
4
1
2
2 play/record, or
2 in/2 out
1 in/2 out
• MPEG-2 4:2:0 @ Main Level from 20-80 Mb/s, long GoP (for HD)
• HD: SMPTE 292M, 1.485 Gbs Serial Digital I/O (includes downconverted SD SDI
and composite analog monitor with text overlay and timecode burn-in)
• 1080i and 720p line rates for HD, 50, 59.94, and 60 fps, accepts house black and
tri-level sync reference
• DVCAM video compression (for SD)
• DVCPRO 25 video compression (for SD)
• DVCPRO 50 video compression with 50 Mb/s option (for SD)
• MPEG-2 4:2:0 @ Main Level from 4 to 15 Mb/s, long GoP (for SD)
• MPEG-2 4:2:2 @ Main Level from 4-25 Mb/s, long GoP or up to 50 Mb/s with
50 Mb/s option (for SD)
• MPEG-D10 I-frame at 30, 40, or 50 Mb/s CBG with 50 Mb/s option (for SD)
• Back-to-back playout of all SD formats on any SD codec
• Up-conversion of SD MPEG-2 4:2:0 clips with aspect ratio configuration (requires
Definition Independent option, Agile Output)
• Down-conversion of HD clips with aspect ratio configuration (requires Definition
Independent option, Agile Output)
24
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Profile XP Media Platform features
PVS3500 features include:
• Up to 3 high definition (HD) channels of broadcast-quality video
• Up to 4 standard definition (SD) channels of broadcast-quality video
PVS3500 Series channel configurations by model
Model
Number
Number of SD
video codecs
Number of HD
MPEG Encoders
Number of HD
MPEG Decoders
SD Channel
Configuration
HD Channel
Configuration
PVS3502
0
0
2
0 in/1 out,
down-converted
0 in/1 out
PVS3504
0
0
4
0 in/2 out,
down-converted
0 in/2 out
PVS3504H
0
0
4
0 in/0 out
0 in/4 out
PVS3512
0
1
2
0 in/1out,
down-converted
1 in/2 out
PVS3514
0
1
4
0 in/2 out
down-converted
1 in/2 out
PVS3522
2
0
2
2 play/record, or
1 in/1 out
0 in/2 out
PVS3524
2
0
4
2 play/record, or
2 in/2 out
0 in/2 out
PVS3532
2
1
2
2 play/record, or
1 in/1 out
1 in/2 out
PVS3534
2
1
4
2 play/record, or
2 in/2 out
1 in/2 out
• MPEG-2 4:2:0 @ Main Level from 20-80 Mb/s, long GoP (for HD)
• HD: SMPTE 292M, 1.485 Gbs Serial Digital I/O (includes downconverted SD SDI
and composite analog monitor with text overlay and timecode burn-in)
• 1080i and 720p line rates for HD, 50, 59.94, and 60 fps, accepts house black and
tri-level sync reference
• DVCAM video compression (for SD)
• DVCPRO 25 video compression (for SD)
• DVCPRO 50 video compression with 50 Mb/s option (for SD)
• MPEG-2 4:2:0 @ Main Level from 4 to 15 Mb/s, long GoP
• MPEG-2 4:2:2 @ Main Level from 4-25 Mb/s, long GoP or up to 50 Mb/s with
50 Mb/s option (for SD)
• MPEG-D10 I-frame at 30, 40, or 50 Mb/s CBG with 50 Mb/s option (for SD)
• Back-to-back playout of all SD formats on any SD codec
• Up-conversion of SD MPEG-2 4:2:0 clips with aspect ratio configuration
• Down-conversion of HD clips with aspect ratio configuration
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
25
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
About channels and factory default configuration
Profile applications use channels to control disk recording and playback. A channel
defines a grouping of video, audio, and timecode resources and is identified by a unique
name. Profile XP software supports three channel types: Recorder channel, Player
channel, or Player/Recorder channel.
Your Profile XP system is shipped with default Recorder, Player, or Recorder/Player
channels. These default channels are named Vtr1, Vtr2, Vtr3 and so on. The following
table describes the video and audio connections you’ll make for the channel types. The
Installation Guide contains specifics about the type and number of default channels in
your Profile XP model, and their video and audio I/O connections.
Default channel
type
Video I/O
connections
Audio connectionsa
Timecode I/O
Recorder
1 SDI or HD-SDI
video input
1 analog monitor b
2, 4, or 8 audio I/Os
Uses the internal
timecode generator.
Player
1 SDI or HD-SDI
video output
2, 4, or 8 audio I/Os
Recorded timecode is
used to generate VITC on
the SDI video output or
insert VITC in the
HD-SDI output
Player/Recorder
1 SDI video input and
output
1 analog monitor b
2, 4, or 8 audio I/Os
Uses the internal
timecode generator.
Recorded timecode is
used to generate VITC on
the SDI video output.
a.
The number of audio I/Os is determined by your Profile XP model and the number of Audio boards
installed.
b.
Available on the PVS1000 and PVS1100 Series only if the optional Video Monitor board is
installed. Input monitoring is always available as a connection on the HD-SDI board.
You can use the information in this System Guide to modify default channel settings to
satisfy the needs of your system. For more information about channels, refer to
Chapter 4, Adding or Removing Channels.
26
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Video compression for standard definition
Video compression for standard definition
The Profile XP Media Platform uses a variety of standard definition video compression
formats: MPEG-2, DVCPRO 25, DVCPRO 50, and MPEG D10. Files of different
compression types can be stored concurrently on the media platform, and accessed
concurrently by different channels.
MPEG-2 support
The PVS1000 uses MPEG-2 4:2:2 @ Main Level encoding with selectable bit rates from
4 Mb/s to 50 Mb/s. The additional chroma resolution that 4:2:2 sampling gives provides
good multi-generation capability as well as up-conversion quality. 4:2:0 chroma
sampling is also available, allowing the creation of clips that can be up converted to HD
resolutions on an HD decoder with the Definition Independent option, which is included
on the PVS3500.
Seamless play and cuts editing at any bit rate and any GoP is made possible by the
Profile XP dual MPEG decoder architecture that allows storage efficiencies of a long
GoP and maintains the ability to cut on any frame and play clips back-to-back
seamlessly. This provides all of the advantages of long GoP encoding, without the
limitations.
The PVS1100 provides MPEG-2 4:2:2 support at bit rates up to 25 Mb/s, and up to
50 Mb/s with the 50 Mb/s option. The PVS1100 also provides MPEG D10 compatibility.
MPEG D10 is an MPEG format that was developed for tape. It is characterized by a
selectable fixed bit rate (30, 40, or 50 Mb/s) and constrained byte GoP (CBG), that
prevents the size of a field from exceeding the physical size of the tape scan.
DVCPRO support
The PVS1100 provides DVCPRO 25 and optional DVCPRO 50 compression formats.
These formats improve work flow by allowing the transfer of material between other
equipment and the Profile XP media platform without re-encoding the compressed
video.
Video compression for high definition
The PVS2000 uses MPEG-2 4:2:0 @ Main Level encoding with selectable bit rates from
20 Mb/s to 80 Mb/s.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
27
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
Fibre Channel RAID storage
IMPORTANT: If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN, refer to
the Open SAN Instruction Manual for information about media storage.
The Profile XP Media Platform supports two storage options, distributed and
centralized.
Distributed Storage
Distributed storage is implemented using RAID storage systems connected directly to
each Profile XP Media Platform. Each Profile XP system accesses media on its own
dedicated storage system. Increased availability to storage is provided by an optional
redundant RAID controller board available for the RAID storage system. If the primary
connection fails, the system automatically switches over and uses the redundant
connection. Media is shared in the distributed storage model by transferring the media
files over an optional video network adapter. With Profile streaming protocol, media
playout can begin before the video network transfer is complete.
Centralized Storage
The Profile XP centralized storage solution, the Open SAN, is implemented using a
Fibre Channel switch fabric to connect all RAID storage chassis and Profile XP Media
Platforms. Centralized storage provides multiple Profile XP Media Platforms
simultaneous access to a common pool of media. As in distributed storage, a redundant
Fibre Channel connection option is available to provide a redundant path to the
centralized storage pool in case the primary path fails.
Fibre Channel and/or Ethernet IP Video Networks
The Profile XP family offers true IP networking of media files over Fibre Channel or
Ethernet.
• Faster than real time transfers (up to 40x) with no generation loss
• Reliable transfers using secure file transfer protocols
• IP networking enables files to be moved between devices or between facilities over
standard public networks.
• Profile network streaming enables “play while transferring”
Fibre Channel Streaming enables the file to be used shortly after the destination Profile
starts receiving it — just like you can do with a traditional video router. This eliminates
the traditional drawback of networking in which the file must finish transferring before
a user has access to edit it or play it out.
28
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Front panel controls and indicators
Front panel controls and indicators
The front panel includes the following controls and indicators:
➊
Power-On LED - indicates the standby switch is in the on position and that secondary
voltages are present in the chassis.
➋
Standby Switch - provides
➌
System Fault LED -
system On/Off control.
indicates a system fault exist somewhere in the Profile XP unit.
Pull here to
open (each side)
1 Standby/On LED
Accessory
Door
Accessory
Door
0624-5
Chassis Pull
13 May 2005
Standby/On
2 Switch
System
3 Fault LED
Profile XP System Guide
29
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
The front panel features two accessory doors that provide access to several storage
devices. The following describes the storage devices installed on the standard Profile XP
system.
➊
System Disk - contains
the Windows NT operating system and Profile XP system
software and applications.
➋
1.44MB Floppy Disk Drive
➌
CD-ROM Drive - for maintaining the Windows NT operating system and performing
Profile XP system software upgrades.
NOTE: If an accessory door is accidentally dislocated from its hinges, you can
easily pop it back into place.
0624-4
System
1 Disk Drive
30
Profile XP System Guide
Floppy
2 Disk Drive
CD-ROM
3 Drive
13 May 2005
Front panel controls and indicators
The following describes the storage devices in a Profile XP system with the redundant
system disk option.
➊
Primary System Drive - contains
Windows NT operating system and Profile XP
software and applications.
➋
Mirror System Disk - mirrors
➌
Drive Mirroring Controller and Indicator Panel -
primary system disk and provides automatic fail-over
in the event the primary system disk fails.
The Indicator Panel status LEDs indicate the operating mode of the mirroring
system as follows:
- Green - Drives are in Mirror mode
- Red - Drives in Single mode
- Orange - Drive activity
The Buzzer Off switch can be used to silence the buzzer, which sounds under the
following conditions:
- Short beep during power on indicates successful boot-up
- Second beep indicates the mirroring system is running in single mode
- Continuous or intermittent beep to indicate a drive failure
➍
CD-ROM Drive - for maintaining the
➎
1.44MB Floppy Disk Drive
Windows NT operating system and performing
Profile XP system software upgrades.
Primary System
1 Disk Drive
Mirrored System
2 Disk Drive
DupliDisk
Primary Mirror
Status
Buzzer
0625-18
DupliDisk
3 Indicator Panel
13 May 2005
CD-ROM
4 Drive
Superdrive or
5 Floppy Drive
Profile XP System Guide
31
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
Rear Panel View
The figure shows the rear panel connectors. Rear panel drawings for peripheral
equipment are located in Appendix C, “Rack Mounting Information and Rear Panel
Drawings”.
FC Disk (Port A)
Profile XP Media Platform
Monitor
Parallel Port
Com1 (RS-232)
Power Cord
Power
Good LED
Ethernet
(Windows NT
Network)
Reference In
(Loop-Thru)
Optional
Power
Supply
Mouse
Keyboard
RS-422
Breakout
Audio
Audio
Channels Channels
1-16 (opt.)
1-16
32
Profile XP System Guide
Video I/O,
VideoOut, or
Video Monitor
FC Disk LTC/ Video
(Port B) GPI network (opt.)
8112-1
13 May 2005
Standard accessories
Standard accessories
The Profile XP Media Platform is shipped with the following standard accessories:
• Manuals Include:
- Installation Guide
- Profile XP System Guide
- Profile XP User Manual
- Profile XP Service Manual
- Profile XP Release Notes
• Software package which includes the Profile XP Software CD-ROM
• Windows NT software package
• Keyboard and mouse
• I/O Panel and cables (provides LTC, RS-422 & GPI interfaces)
• Power cable
• Rack mounting slides
• Ethernet cable
• System rebuild CD-ROM
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
33
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
Profile XP Media Platform system overview
The Profile XP Media Platform system is an extension to a standard PCI bus-based
Windows NT computer. This standard is enhanced to add functionality and performance
necessary to deliver an industrial grade, broadcast-quality disk-based video server. This
section discusses the major architectural blocks, what they do, and how they
interconnect.
High level block diagram
The Profile XP Media Platform has three subsystems: Application Subsystem, Real
Time Subsystem, and Storage Subsystem.
User Interface, Control,
Configuration
Application
Subsystem
Video I/O, Audio I/O,
Media Networking
IPM
Channel
Real Time
Subsystem
Fibre
Channel
Media
Storage
Subsystem
Platform
Resources
0624-40
Application Subsystem
The Application Subsystem is a Windows NT computer subsystem. The Application
Subsystem provides a platform for running Windows based applications for configuring
and controlling the Real Time Subsystem both locally and remotely.
Real Time Subsystem
The Real Time Subsystem contains a real time processor and peripheral devices and runs
the VXWorks operating system.The Real Time Subsystem manages all the hardware
involved in controlling the flow of video, audio, timecode in and out of the system. This
includes video I/O boards, audio I/O boards, video compression boards, and networking
and storage. The Real Time Subsystem is controlled by applications running on the
Applications Subsystem using Inter-Processor Messaging channels (IPM). It is
responsible for the execution of events on the play timeline.
34
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Board level block diagram
Media Storage Subsystem
IMPORTANT: If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN, refer to
the Open SAN Instruction Manual for information about media storage.
The Storage Subsystem is where the video, audio, timecode and other media related data
is stored. This storage system is made up of one or more external RAID level 3 storage
chassis containing Fibre Channel disks. The Profile XP Real Time Subsystem controls
read/write disk operations by sending SCSI protocol commands over one or more Fibre
Channel links.
Platform Resources
The platform resources provide the infrastructure necessary to operate, interconnect, and
integrate all the Application Subsystem, Real Time Subsystem components. The
elements that comprise the Platform Resources are: Multi-slot PCI bus, video & audio
crosspoint fabric, power supply and system cooling.
Board level block diagram
This section describes the Profile XP architecture in more detail using a board level
block diagram. From this discussion you‘ll gain an understanding of the basic signal
flow in the Profile XP system. Use this information when you are installing and setting
up the Profile XP Media Platform.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
35
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
Real Time Subsystem
Media Storage Subsystem
Fibre Channel
Disk Interface
SDI
2In/2Out
Port A
Crosspoint
Examples
Video
Compression
(up to 8 channels
total)
Local or Shared Storage
MPEG-2
Encoder
(2Ch SD)
SDI
4Out
Applications Subsystem
PCI Bus
PCI Bus
MPEG-2
Decoder
(2Ch SD)
Video
Monitor
NTSC/PAL
SVGA
Applications
Processor
(plus Windows NT)
Add. Encoder/
Decoder Boards
Audio Interface
Port B
Mouse
Kybd
Ethernet
Add. I/O Boards
3.5
FD
Audio Interface
Audio
(Ch1-16)
Audio
(Ch1-16)
Net.
Net.
Video/Audio
Crosspoint
Fabric
Real Time
System Board
LTC & GPI
I/Os
4
LTC
4
GPI
8
8
Fibre Ch.
Video
Network
Genlock
HD
Mirror
HD
8 CH
RS-422
Interface
Real Time
Processor
Ethernet
Video
Network
CD
I/O
Panel
Video
Embedded
Audio
Ref In
AES/EBU
Audio
PCI Bus
8112-3
Profile XP
Optional item
Block diagram for PVS1000 standard definition system
36
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Board level block diagram
Real Time Subsystem
Media Storage Subsystem
Not Available when
Embedded Audio is used.
NTSC/PAL
SD SDI
HD out
HD in
HD SDI
Fibre Channel
Disk Interface
Video
Compression
Port A
"
!
#
$
&
%
'
!
"
#
Port B
$
%
&
'
HD
MPEG-2
Encoder
PFC 500 System
(RAID 3 Storage)
HD SDI
SVGA
Add. Encoder/
Decoder Boards
HD SDI*
Crosspoint
Examples
Audio Interface
Applications Subsystem
PCI Bus
PCI Bus
HD
MPEG-2
Decoder
Applications
Processor
(plus Windows NT)
Needed only when
Embedded Audio is used.
3.5
FD
Add. I/O Boards
Audio Interface
Audio
(Ch1-16)
Audio
(Ch1-16)
Net.
Net.
Real Time
System Board
Video/Audio
Crosspoint
Fabric
Ethernet
Video
Network
HD
Kybd
Ethernet
Mirror
HD
8 CH
RS-422
Interface
Real Time
Processor
LTC & GPI
I/Os
CD
Mouse
LTC
4
GPI
8
4
I/O
Panel
8
Genlock
Ref In
Video
Embedded
Audio
Fibre Ch.
Video
Network
*Embedded audio
requires extra SDI board.
PCI Bus
AES/EBU
Audio
0624-65
Profile XP
Optional item
Block diagram for PVS2000 high definition system
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
37
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
Real Time Subsystem
Media Storage
Subsystem
Fibre Channel
Disk Interface
SDI
2In/2Out
Crosspoint
Examples
SDI
4Out
Video
Compression
(up to 8 channels
total)
Port A
Local or Shared Storage
Video
Processor
Board
Codec
Applications Subsystem
PCI Bus
PCI Bus
Codec
Video
Monitor
NTSC/PAL
SVGA
Applications
Processor
(plus Windows NT)
Add. Processor
Boards
Audio Interface
Port B
Mouse
Kybd
Ethernet
Add. I/O Boards
3.5
FD
Audio Interface
Audio
(Ch1-16)
Audio
(Ch1-16)
Net.
Net.
Video/Audio
Crosspoint
Fabric
Real Time
System Board
LTC & GPI
I/Os
4
LTC
4
GPI
8
Genlock
PCI Bus
Mirror
HD
I/O
Panel
Video
Embedded
Audio
8
Fibre Ch.
Video
Network
HD
8 CH
RS-422
Interface
Real Time
Processor
Ethernet
Video
Network
CD
Ref In
AES/EBU
Audio
8112-4
Profile XP
Optional item
Block diagram for PVS1100 standard definition system
38
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Board level block diagram
Motherboard
The Profile XP system motherboard contains 14 board slots. Each slot includes a
connection to the system PCI bus and the Video/Audio Transport Fabric. The
Video/Audio transport fabric is an integrated 96x96 crosspoint switch which provides
uncompressed video (CCIR601) and audio (24bit) routing.
Applications Subsystem
The Applications Subsystem is a Windows NT computer system and includes the
following components:
Application Processor Board
The Application Engine is a standard NLX single board computer. The Application
Subsystem provides a platform for running Windows based applications for configuring
and controlling the Real Time Subsystem both locally and remotely. Rear panel I/O
includes:
• Mouse, Keyboard, and SVGA Connectors
• One Serial Port
• One Parallel Port
• Two USB Ports
• Audio Line Level IN/OUT, and Mic Input
• 10/100BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet Port
RS422 Board
This RS-422 adapter is installed as part of the Applications Processor system under
Windows NT. Control applications running on the Application Processor receive control
commands from a remote protocol listener that monitors the RS-422 ports.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
39
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
Real Time Subsystem
The Real Time Subsystem includes the following components:
Real Time System
The Real Time System board contains a real time processor and peripheral devices. A
second generation of this board, Real Time System II, is now used for all Profile XP
models. The RTP-II board requires Profile System Software v. 5.0 or higher. This board
manages all the hardware involved in controlling the flow of video, audio, timecode in
and out of the system. This includes video I/O boards, audio I/O boards, video
compression boards, and networking and storage. Other board functionality includes:
• Generation of system clocks for SD (27MHz) and HD (either 37.0879 or 37.125
Mhz)
• Generation of frame reference pulses
• Ability to lock system clocks and frame reference pulses to tri-level sync or to
NTSC/PAL bi-level sync (reference video input).
• LTC In reader and LTC Out generator.
• VITC reader for reference video input.
• GPI (8 In, 8 Out)
• Black generator and Colorbar generator used for loss of input or output video
conditions (SD only).
Serial Digital Video Boards
These boards provide four serial digital video (270 Mb/s SMPTE 259M), either
2In/2Out or 4 Out, through four BNC connectors on the rear of the board. An internal
frame buffer is provided for each video input on the board for auto-timing synchronous
and asynchronous inputs. Embedded audio is supported — maximum of 8 channels
audio per video input— and is routed over the video routing fabric. VITC can be read
from each input and generated on each output.
High Definition Serial Digital Video Board
This board, through four BNC connectors, provides one SMPTE292M serial digital
video input, one SMPTE292M serial digital video output, a standard SDI (SMPTE
259M) output, and a composite analog NTSC or PAL monitor output. The HD-SDI
board can function as both input and output if AES/EBU audio is in use, but when
embedded audio is used, the board functions either as input or output but not both. The
output on the standard SDI port and monitor port is down-converted from the high
definition output signal. The composite analog monitor output includes Text Overlay
and Timecode burn-in.
Video Monitor (optional)
The Video Monitor board provides four analog composite video outputs for monitoring
purposes. The outputs include Text Overlay and Timecode burn-in.
40
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Board level block diagram
Audio Board
The Audio board provides sixteen channels of 16- or 24-bit audio I/O. An additional
Audio Board may be added as an option for a total of 32 channels of audio.
Audio I/O formats include
• Embedded
• AES/EBU
• Analog
The Audio board includes a rear panel 80 pin interface connector for AES/EBU
audio I/O. For AES/EBU operation, a breakout panel is required. For operation with
analog signals, the PAC216 Analog Audio Chassis is required for conversion of analog
signals to AES/EBU.
Embedded audio is extracted from the video inputs by the Video I/O boards and routed
over the Video/Audio Transport Fabric to the Audio board.
Audio processed by the Audio board is routed over the PCI bus to the Media Storage
Subsystem. The audio board does not compress the audio for storage, but can pass
through pre-compressed Dolby E and AC-3 compressed signals.
MPEG-2 Encoder and Decoder Boards (PVS1000 Series)
Each MPEG-2 Encoder or MPEG-2 Decoder board provides 2 channels of video
processing. Encoding bit rates are from 4 Mb/s to 50 Mb/s. Up to four of these type
boards can be installed in a Profile XP system.
For record mode, video is routed from the Video I/O boards, over the video transport
fabric to the MPEG-2 Encoder Board. MPEG-2 compressed data is moved over the PCI
bus to the Media Storage Subsystem. For play mode, MPEG-2 compressed data is routed
from the Media Storage Subsystem, over PCI bus, to the MPEG-2 Decoder board where
the data is processed. Full bandwidth video is routed from the MPEG-2 Decoder board
over the video transport fabric to the Video I/O boards.
HD MPEG-2 Encoder and Decoder Boards (PVS2000 and PVS3000 Series)
The HD MPEG-2 Encoder provides one channel of video processing. The maximum rate
is 80 Mb/s, while the minimum usable rate is 20 Mb/s. Video routing for HD in record
and play modes is the same as for SD.
The HD MPEG-2 Decoder provides two channels of video processing. Each decoder can
play HD or SD MPEG-2 4:2:0 clips to either an SD or an HD SDI output, up- or
down-converting appropriately. This ability is enable through the Definition
Independent option, which is included on all PVS3500 system.
Video Processor board (PVS1100 Series)
The two models of Video Processor board provide two or four channels of video
compression and decompression. Up to eight channels can be installed in a Profile XP
system.
In their default configuration, the codecs on the Video Processor board are set for
DVCPRO 25 operation. A codec can be reconfigured to be either an MPEG encoder, an
MPEG decoder, or an MPEG codec, with bit rates selectable from 4-25 Mb/s at 4:2:2
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
41
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
chroma sampling, or 4-15 Mb/s at 4:2:0 chroma sampling. With the 50 Mb/s software
option installed, each codec can be configured for DVCPRO 50 operation, MPEG D10
operation at 30, 40, or 50 Mb/s, or MPEG operation up to 50 Mb/s.
When a codec is reconfigured, the media platform must be restarted to put the change
into effect. However, any codec can play all formats of SD clip seamlessly, back to back,
without any configuration changes.
For record mode, video is routed from the Video I/O boards, over the video transport
fabric to the Video Processor board. Compressed data is moved over the PCI bus to the
Media Storage Subsystem. For play mode, compressed data is routed from the Media
Storage Subsystem, over PCI bus, to the Video Processor board where the data is
processed. Full bandwidth video is routed from the Video Processor board over the video
transport fabric to the Video I/O boards.
Video Network Adapter (Optional)
The Video Network Adapter is a 1Gb/s Fibre Channel board or 100BaseT Ethernet board
for video network connections. Both provide faster than real-time transfers of video data.
Media Storage Subsystem
The Media Storage Subsystem includes the following components:
Fibre Channel Disk Board
This is a dual port Fibre Channel Disk board for connecting the Profile XP system to the
external Fibre Channel RAID storage system in either a local or centralized storage
configuration. In local storage configurations, the Fibre Channel RAID storage system
is connected directly to the Fibre Channel Disk board. In centralized storage
configurations, this board is connected to a Fibre Channel switch fabric to provide access
to a centralized pool of Fibre Channel RAID storage systems.
When the RAID storage systems are configured with an optional second controller
board, Port B of the Fibre Channel Disk board can be connected to provide a redundant
path to the disks.
Both ports use hot-swappable copper or optical Small Form-Factor Pluggable interfaces
(SFPs) to connect to Fibre Channel cables. Copper connections allow transfers at up to
1Gb/s, while optical cables and SFPs support up to 2Gb/s rates.
Fibre Channel RAID Chassis
The high performance RAID storage system provides the Profile XP a low profile,
compact storage system with either 36, 73, or 146 GB Fibre Channel drives. The Fibre
Channel RAID Chassis is a Fibre Channel disk array with RAID drives, hot spares,
dual power supplies (optional), redundant controllers (optional) and spare fans.
The Fibre Channel RAID Chassis comes with either 36, 73, or 146 GB drives. You
can expand the RAID storage system with the Expansion chassis, which houses 5, 10,
or 15 drives but does not need a RAID controller. The Fibre Channel RAID Chassis
offers optional redundant RAID controllers. If one fails, the system will automatically
switch over to the second controller within a few seconds.
42
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Starting the Profile XP system
Starting the Profile XP system
IMPORTANT: If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN,
disregard these instructions and refer to the instructions Open SAN Instruction
Manual for starting the Profile XP system.
When starting your system, you must power-on the RAID storage system and then the
Profile XP Media Platform as described in the following procedure.
To power-on the Profile XP system:
1. Power-on all peripheral devices connected to the Profile XP, including all RAID
storage chassis.
NOTE: Always power-on the RAID Expansion chassis prior to, or at the same time
as the RAID Controller chassis.
2. Wait for RAID storage initialization, as follows:
- PFR700 RAID Storage systems - Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady —
approximately 4 minutes. The controller READY LED must be ON, the front
Power LED must be ON, and the front Service LED must be OFF. (Refer to the
PFR 700 Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or status LED
behavior.)
- PFR600 RAID Storage systems - Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady
green is illuminated — approximately 4 minutes. The rear panel 7-segment LED
displays the chassis address. (Refer to the PFR 600 Instruction Manual to
interpret other disk access LED or 7-segment LED behavior.)
- PFR500 RAID Storage systems - Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady
green and the HOST RDY LED is illuminated — approximately 4 minutes. The
rear panel 7-segment LED displays the chassis address. (Refer to the PFR 500
Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or 7-segment LED
behavior.)
- PFC500 RAID Storage systems - Wait until the System Check LED is off and
all disk access LEDs are steady green— approximately 2 minutes. (Refer to the
PFC500 Instruction Manual to interpret other front panel LED behavior.)
NOTE: Do not power-on the Profile XP Media Platform until the RAID storage
chassis are fully initialized.
3. Power-on the Profile XP Media Platform and wait for the Windows operating
system to initialize and perform auto-logon. The Windows NT desktop will appear
after successful auto-logon. Otherwise, refer to “Logging on Windows NT” on
page 44.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
43
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
Logging on Windows NT
When the Profile system powered-on and before Windows NT boots, you must make a
choice of how you want to logon the system.
Automatic Logon
When the Profile XP system is powered on, you may let Windows NT go through an
automatic logon sequence. The system will perform automatic logon using a default
account called profile. After automatic logon, the Windows NT desktop will appear.
Automatic logon will occur at power On when:
- The profile account was used the last time the Profile XP Media Platform was
turned off.
- The Profile XP Media Platform is initially powered On from the factory. (The
factory sets the last user to profile prior to shipment.)
Logging on as Administrator
When the Profile XP system is powered On, you may interrupt automatic logon and
logon as Administrator. It is not necessary to logon as administrator to configure Profile
System software. However, you must logon as Administrator for Windows NT
administration and to:
- Configure Ethernet network settings (see Chapter 11, Setting up a Simple
Network).
- Install new software applications or upgrades (see Profile XP Release Notes).
To log on as Administrator at Power Up
To logon as Administrator at power-up:
1. Power-on the Profile XP system, then hold the Shift key down during start-up to
prevent auto-logon as profile. Be sure to continue holding the shift key until the
logon dialog box appears.
2. Logon as administrator. The default administrator password on a Profile system is
triton.
The next time the Profile XP system is restarted, Windows NT will display a logon error
message. When this occurs, use the logon dialog box to logon manually as administrator
or as profile (see the following procedure).
44
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Logging on as Profile
Logging on as Administrator from Profile account
To logon as Administrator from Profile account:
1. Log on as Administrator using the following steps:
a. Press the Control-Alt-Del key sequence. The Windows NT Security dialog box
appears.
b. Click Log off. The Log off Windows NT dialog box appears.
c. Press and hold down the Shift key on the Profile XP keyboard, then click OK.
NOTE: You must hold down the shift key to over-ride auto-logon.
d. When the Begin Logon dialog box appears release the Shift key, then press the
Control-Alt-Del key sequence.
e. Enter the following, then click OK.
Username: Administrator
Password: triton
You are now logged on as Administrator and can modify system settings.
Logging on as Profile
After performing system administrative tasks using the Administrator user account,
Profile account to enable the automatic logon feature for future system boots.
To logon as profile:
1. Power up or log off the Profile XP System.
2. When the logon error message appears click OK.
3. Enter the following, then click OK.
Username: Profile
Password: profile
Windows NT will now perform automatic logon the next time the system is
restarted.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
45
Chapter 1
Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform
Shutting down the Profile XP system
To shut down your Profile XP system without loss of data, you must:
1. Quit all Profile applications by selecting Quit or Exit from the File menu.
2. Exit or Quit any other processes which may be running in the same way.
3. Shutdown Windows NT by pressing the CTRL+ALT+DEL key sequence and
choosing Shutdown.
4. When Windows NT displays a message that it is safe to turn off the system, turn
the front panel switch to Standby.
IMPORTANT: If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN,
disregard the following step and refer to the instructions Open SAN Instruction
Manual for shutting down the Open SAN.
5. Power-off the RAID storage system by powering-off the RAID Controller chassis
prior to, or at the same time as the RAID Expansion chassis.
>>> CAUTION: You must always power off the PFR500 RAID Controller chassis prior
to, or at the same time as the Expansion Chassis. Failure to do so on a PFR500 may
force some LUNs offline. This will cause loss of access to the media file system
when the system is powered on again. Refer to “Forcing LUNs online: Recovery
from improper power-off sequence” on page 103.
6. Power-off all peripheral devices.
46
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
2
Working with Configuration Manager
Configuration manager is the tool you’ll use to set up the Profile XP for operation.
You’ll use Configuration Manager to do things like create a video file system on the
RAID storage system, create or modify channels, and configure system hardware
settings. Some models allow you to configure codecs. The Configuration Manager
window appears as shown here.
This chapter gives a brief tour of Configuration Manager. Also included are instructions
for remote configuration and saving/restoring configuration settings.
Sections in this chapter include:
• Tour of Configuration Manager
• Viewing board location information
• Saving and restoring your system settings
• Importing system settings
• Remote configuration
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
47
Chapter 2
Working with Configuration Manager
Tour of Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager provides a central graphical user interface for all system
configuration tasks. Configuration Manager includes the following selection items:
• File System - used to configure the media storage system
• Network - used to set up the video network option
• Video setup items - used to configure video input and output settings, and on the
models that have them, video codecs
• Audio setup items - used to configure audio input and output settings
• Channel Configuration - used to add and modify channels.
File System
Choosing File System in Configuration Manager opens the Disk Utility dialog box. Use
the pages in the Disk Utility to configure local storage (connected directly to the
Profile XP system).
IMPORTANT: If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN, follow
the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for configuring storage.
For more information on configuring storage, see Chapter 3, “Working with RAID
Storage Using GVG Disk Utility”.
48
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Network
Network
Choosing Network in Configuration Manager opens the video network configuration
pages. Use these pages to configure the settings for the optional video network.
For more information on setting up the video network option, see Chapter 11, “Setting
up a Simple Network”.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
49
Chapter 2
Working with Configuration Manager
Video setup items
Configuration Manager includes four items used for configuring the video
input/output settings. These include:
• Video Timing - used to select the video standard and for setting up reference
genlock and video output timing.
• Video Input - used to configure the settings for each video input, including:
input frame buffer operation, input blanking, loss of signal behavior and VITC
reader settings.
• Video Output - used to configure the settings for each video output including:
loss of signal behavior, vertical interval blanking, and VITC generator settings.
• Video Codec - Used to configure the operation of each video codec present on
the Profile XP models that have one or more Video Codec boards.
• Video Monitor - used to set up timecode burn-in and text overlay on the optional
video monitor board or monitor output on the HD SDI board.
See Chapter 5, “Modifying a Channel: Video Settings”, for more information on
modifying video settings.
50
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Audio setup items
Audio setup items
Configuration Manager includes four menu items used for configuring the audio input/
output settings. These include:
• Audio Reference - used to set the audio reference level. The audio reference
level is used to set the default audio level in some Profile applications.
• Audio Input - used to adjust the analog audio input gain and monitor the status
of AES/EBU input signals.
• Audio Output - used to adjust the analog audio output gain.
• Audio Routing - used to set up audio sources and destinations for Profile XP
audio channels.
See Chapter 6, “Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings”, for more information on
modifying audio settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
51
Chapter 2
Working with Configuration Manager
License Configuration
Choosing License Configuration in Configuration Manager opens the SabreTooth
License Request wizard. The SabreTooth License Manager is used to obtain, install, and
manage licenses required to enable some of the optional features of your Profile XP
Media Platform.
See Chapter 9, “Managing Optional Licenses”, for more information on using Channel
Configuration.
52
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Channel Configuration
Channel Configuration
Choosing Channel Configuration in Configuration Manager opens the Channel
Configuration window. Channel Configuration is used to modify or create channels that
are used by Profile applications.
See Chapter 4, “Adding or Removing Channels”, for more information on using Channel
Configuration.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
53
Chapter 2
Working with Configuration Manager
Viewing hardware settings summary dialog boxes
Use summary dialog boxes to view hardware settings in Configuration Manager.
Summary dialog boxes are displayed when you click the Finish button on a configuration
page. The Video Monitor Summary dialog box is shown here as an example.
Clicking Back in a summary dialog box returns you to the configuration page without
saving your settings. Clicking the OK closes the summary dialog box and saves your
settings.
54
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Viewing hardware settings summary dialog boxes
Show or hide summary dialog boxes
You can choose to hide the summary dialog boxes. This allows you to click the Finish
button on configuration pages to store your settings without displaying the summary.
To show or hide summary dialog boxes, in the Configuration Manager View menu,
choose Show Summary.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
55
Chapter 2
Working with Configuration Manager
Viewing board location information
Selecting Board Location in the View menu allows you to view the location and type of
circuit boards installed in your Profile XP.
To view board location information:
1. Select View | Board Location. The Profile Board Location window appears.
2. Click Ok to close the window.
56
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Saving and restoring your system settings
Saving and restoring your system settings
You can use Configuration Manager to save a copy of your hardware settings and
channels in named configuration files. Later, you can easily restore settings by opening
the saved configuration files. Configuration Manager also allows you to restore factory
default settings.
Using the Save a copy/Open feature you can:
• Easily modify Profile XP system configuration for a different use.
• Revert to a known good configuration.
• Duplicate configurations on Profile XP systems.
Saving a copy of your system configuration
Use the Save a Copy command in the Configuration Manager File menu to save the
current configuration to a named configuration file. You can choose to save the current
channel and hardware settings or just channel settings by saving the appropriate file type.
To save a copy of your system configuration:
1. In Configuration Manager select, File | Save a Copy. The Save As dialog box
appears.
2. Choose whether to save hardware and channel configuration (.cfg) or the channel
configuration only (.cdf) using the Save as type drop down list.
NOTE: Opening a .cfg file changes both channel and hardware configuration
while opening a .cdf file changes only channel configuration.
3. Enter the file name, then click Save. Your configuration is stored in the file you
named. You may want to copy your file to floppy disk and store it in a safe place.
NOTE: You can quickly duplicate a configuration on two Profile XP systems by
placing a copy of the saved configuration files on the other machine and then using
the File menu Open command. See “Opening saved configuration files” on page
58.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
57
Chapter 2
Working with Configuration Manager
Opening saved configuration files
You can restore system hardware settings and channels using configuration files you
saved earlier. You can choose to restore the channels and hardware settings or just the
hardware settings by selecting the file type to open.
NOTE: When a configuration file is opened, the current configuration is lost. Be
sure to use the “Save a copy” command in the File menu, if you want to save the
current system configuration.
To open a saved configuration:
1. In Configuration Manager, select File | Open. The Open dialog box appears.
2. Choose the file type you want to open, either .cdf or .cfg, using the File of type drop
down list.
Opening a .cdf file changes the channel configuration settings and keeps the
existing hardware settings. Opening a .cfg file changes both channel and hardware
settings.
3. Find and select the file name you want to open, then click Open. All hardware
settings take immediate effect. If you opened a .cdf file, the new channels are also
available for you to select in Profile applications.
NOTE: If there are hardware differences between Profile XP systems, unusable
configuration items are ignored. Also, the settings for video inputs/outputs are
assigned beginning with the video board closest to slot 1.
58
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Importing system settings
Importing system settings
If your Profile XP systems are connected by an Ethernet network, you can import
configurations to quickly set up two machines the same way. Imported configurations
take immediate effect.
NOTE: When a new configuration is imported, the current configuration is lost. Be
sure to use the “Save a copy” command in the File menu if you want to save the
current configuration before using Import.
When you import a configuration, you can select whether you want to modify hardware
settings, channel configuration, or both. Channel configurations are used by applications
and specify what video, audio, and timecode resources makeup each channel. The
hardware settings specify the video and audio hardware setup for the Profile XP system.
If there are hardware differences between Profile XP systems, unusable configuration
items are ignored. Also, the settings for video inputs/outputs are assigned beginning with
the video board closest to slot 1.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
59
Chapter 2
Working with Configuration Manager
Importing a configuration
To import a configuration:
1. In Configuration Manager, choose File | Import.
60
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Importing a configuration
2. In the Import Configuration dialog box, select the Profile XP system from which
you want to import the configuration.
3. In the Components drop down list, select whether you want to import hardware or
channel configuration, or both, then click the Import button.
The remote configuration is imported to the local Profile XP system.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
61
Chapter 2
Working with Configuration Manager
Remote configuration
You can remotely configure Profile XP systems connected to the Ethernet network with
Configuration Manager running on a Profile XP or on a standard Windows NT
workstation. The Windows NT workstation must have Profile XP software and
Windows NT version 4.0 or later installed. (Refer to your Profile XP Software Release
Notes for more information on installing Profile software on an Windows NT
workstation.
Profile XP
Ethernet
Profile XP
Profile XP
Windows NT
NT Workstation
Workstation running
running Profile
Configuration Manager
Remote Applications
0624-16
To configure remote Profile XP systems:
1. Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network using the procedures in Chapter 11,
“Setting up a Simple Network”, then return to this procedure.
2. Install Profile system software on the Windows NT workstation you want to use to
monitor and configure remote Profile XP systems.
3. Start Port Server on all Profile XP systems by double-clicking the Port Server
shortcut on the desktop or choose Start | Programs | Profile Applications | Port
Server.
62
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Remote configuration
4. Start Configuration Manager on the local system, then, in Configuration Manager,
choose File | Remote Connection. The Remote Connection dialog box appears.
5. Select a Profile XP system in the Remote Host List, then click Connect. The
Configuration Manager reappears. Note that the remote host now appears in the
Configuration Manager title bar.
Remote
Host
Name
6. Configure the remote machine using Configuration Manager. Then use step 4 and
step 5 to configure other remote Profile XP systems as required.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
63
Chapter 2
64
Working with Configuration Manager
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG
Disk Utility
The information here introduces the Fibre Channel RAID storage systems used with the
Profile XP Media Platform. Also included, are procedures for configuring and
maintaining the RAID storage systems using GVG Disk Utility.
Topics included are:
• “RAID chassis product descriptions” on page 66
• “Estimating storage capacity” on page 69
• “Determining maximum video data rate per channel” on page 70
• “Connecting RAID chassis cabling” on page 70
• “Configuring RAID storage using GVG Disk Utility” on page 71
• “Performing RAID storage maintenance using GVG Disk Utility” on page 93
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
65
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
RAID chassis product descriptions
• “PFC500 product description” on page 66
• “PFR500 product description” on page 66
• “PFR600 product description” on page 67
• “PFR700 product description” on page 68
PFC500 product description
The PFC500 is a 3.5 RU 10 drive Fibre Channel disk array with RAID drives, hot spare
drives, dual power supplies (optional), redundant controllers (optional) and spare fans –
all hot swappable. The PFC500 comes with either 36 GB (PFC536) or 73 GB drives
(PFC573).
PFC500 expansion is available using the PFC500E Expansion Chassis which houses 5
or 10 drives, but does not need a RAID controller. The PFC500’s RAID controller will
control up to 2 expansion frames (30 drives total). All PFC500 chassis must contain the
same size disk modules to make full use of the storage capacity.
NOTE: Grass Valley does not support mixing disk drives of differing capacities in
any RAID chassis connected to a Profile XP media platform. For example, if a
PFC500 and PFC500E are connected to a Profile XP system, all the disk drives in
both chassis must be of the same capacity. If a qualified drive of a different capacity
is added, all the drives in the chassis will take on the characteristics of the smallest
drive.
The PFC500 offers optional redundant RAID controllers for automatic failover. Failover
can occur when the primary RAID Controller, Fibre Channel Port of the Profile XP, or
Fibre Channel cable fails. When failover occurs, the system continues to run with
minimal interruption.
For servicing information on the PFC500 RAID storage system including monitoring
the front and rear panel LED indicators, and replacing serviceable modules, refer to the
PFC500 Instruction Manual.
PFR500 product description
The PFR500 contains five or ten half-height 3.5" Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop
(FC-AL) disk drives. The chassis also supports one or two hardware RAID Controllers
in one 3U high rack-mountable chassis. The PFR500 currently uses 73 GB or 146 GB
drive capacities. With ten drives, one chassis holds up to 730 GB or 1.46 TB depending
on disk drive option.
The PFR500E RAID Expansion Chassis provides additional storage capacity. It is an
identical chassis with two Loop Bypass Board installed. Up to nine PFR500E RAID
Expansion Chassis can be connected to a single PFR500 comprising a single disk-array
storage system with a total of 100 drives and 7.3 TB or 14.6 TB of storage depending on
disk drive option. The built-in chassis daisy-chaining capabilities provide for cost
effective storage expansion as requirements grow.
The PFR500 utilizes dual FC-AL technology, allowing two loop configurations within
a single chassis. Port-Bypass Circuits have been added to maintain loop integrity during
failures without user intervention. Each loop and associated Port Bypass Circuits along
66
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
PFR600 product description
with all other active components are on redundant, separate hot swappable modules.
This improves serviceability and increases fault tolerance by eliminating any single
point of failure. With two RAID Controllers, the two loops within a single standard
chassis are configured as a single loop with a backup loop in standby mode.
PFR500 host interface supports both Arbitrated Loop and fabric switching industry
standard Fibre Channel technology. The physical layer is determined by the use of
GBICs.
NOTE: Grass Valley does not support mixing disk drives of differing capacities in
any RAID chassis connected to a Profile XP media platform. For example, if a
PFR500 and PFR500E are connected to a Profile XP system, all the disk drives in
both chassis must be of the same capacity. If a qualified drive of a different capacity
is added, all the drives in the chassis will take on the characteristics of the smallest
drive.
For servicing information on the PFR500 RAID storage system including monitoring
the front and rear panel LED indicators, and replacing serviceable modules, refer to the
PFR500 Instruction Manual.
PFR600 product description
The PFR600 contains five or ten half-height 3.5" Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop
(FC-AL) disk drives. The chassis also supports one or two hardware RAID Controllers
in one 3U high rack-mountable chassis. The PFR600 currently uses 36 GB, 73 GB or
146 GB drive capacities. With ten drives, one chassis holds up to 360 GB, 730 GB or
1.46 TB depending on disk drive option.
The PFR600E RAID Expansion Chassis provides additional storage capacity. It is an
identical chassis with two Loop Bypass Board installed. Up to five PFR600E RAID
Expansion Chassis can be connected to a single PFR600 comprising a single disk-array
storage system with a total of 60 drives and 3.6 TB, 7.3 TB or 14.6 TB of storage
depending on disk drive option. The built-in chassis daisy-chaining capabilities provide
for cost effective storage expansion as requirements grow.
The PFR600 utilizes dual FC-AL technology, allowing two loop configurations within
a single chassis. Port-Bypass Circuits have been added to maintain loop integrity during
failures without user intervention. Each loop and associated Port Bypass Circuits along
with all other active components are on redundant, separate modules. This improves
serviceability and increases fault tolerance by eliminating any single point of failure.
With two RAID Controllers, the two loops within a single standard chassis are
configured as a single loop with a backup loop in standby mode.
PFR600 host interface supports 1Gb or 2Gb Fibre Channel physical layers. The physical
layer is determined by the type of Small Form-Factor Pluggable transceiver (SFP)
installed in the host port. 2Gb operation requires the optical SFP. Copper SFPs are used
for 1Gb operation.
NOTE: Grass Valley does not support mixing disk drives of differing capacities in
any RAID chassis. For example, if a PFR600 and PFR600E are connected to a
Profile XP system, all the disk drives in both chassis must be of the same capacity.
If a qualified drive of a different capacity is added, all the drives in the chassis will
take on the characteristics of the smallest drive.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
67
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Refer to the PFR600 Instruction Manual for service information, including monitoring
the front and rear panel LED status indicators, and replacing serviceable modules.
PFR700 product description
The PFR 700 Series contains five, ten, or fifteen half-height 3.5" Fibre Channel
Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) disk drives. The chassis also supports one or two hardware
RAID Controllers in one 3U high rack-mountable chassis. The PFR 700 Series currently
uses 36GB, 73GB or 146GB drive capacities. With 15 drives, one chassis holds up to
540GB, 1.095TB. or 2.19TB depending on the disk drive option. Drives are numbered
0 to 14 in the PFR700 RAID Chassis.
The PFR 700E RAID Expansion Chassis provides additional storage capacity. One PFR
700E RAID Expansion Chassis can be connected to a single PFR 700 comprising a
single disk-array storage system with a total of 30 drives and 1.08TB, 2.19TB, or 4.38TB
of storage depending on the disk drive option. This provides for cost effective storage
expansion as requirements grow. Drives are numbered 16 to 30 in the PFR 700E RAID
Expansion Chassis. There is no drive 15 between the PFR700 RAID Chassis and the
PFR 700E RAID Expansion Chassis.
The PFR700 utilizes dual FC-AL technology, allowing two loop configurations within
a single chassis. Loop integrity is maintained during failures without user intervention.
Each loop and associated circuits along with all other active components are on
redundant, separate hot swappable modules. This improves serviceability and increases
fault tolerance by eliminating any single point of failure.
The PFR700 controllers provide enhanced performance of up to 2 Gb/s transfer rates
using SCSI protocol. Optical cables connect to hosts, such as to a Profile XP Media
Platform equipped with a Fibre Channel Disk II card, or to a Fibre Channel switch in an
Open SAN installation. Copper cables connect a PFR700 to the PFR700E RAID
Expansion Chassis
NOTE: Grass Valley does not support mixing disk drives of differing capacities in
any RAID chassis. For example, if a PFR700 and PFR700E are connected to a
Profile XP system, all the disk drives in both chassis must be of the same capacity.
If a qualified drive of a different capacity is added, all the drives in the chassis will
take on the characteristics of the smallest drive.
Refer to the PFR700 Instruction Manual for service information, including monitoring
the front and rear panel LED status indicators, and replacing serviceable modules.
68
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Estimating storage capacity
Estimating storage capacity
The storage capacity is determined by the number and size of disk drives in system, and
the video data rate selected to record video. The Fibre Channel RAID storage system can
be configured with five to thirty disk drives, including the Expansion chassis.
You can refer the following tables for storage capacity estimates based on the number of
disk drives installed and the video data rate. The estimates in these tables are based on
use of four audio channels and one time code channel per video channel using the 525
video format.
Storage capacity estimates in hours using 36 GB drives:
Video Data
Rate
5 Drives
10
Drives
15
Drives
20
Drives
25
Drives
30
Drives
4 Mb/s
37.8
75.6
113.4
151.2
189
226.8
8 Mb/s
25.4
50.8
76.2
101.6
127
152.4
12 Mb/s
19.1
38.2
57.3
76.4
95.5
114.6
15 Mb/s
16.1
32.2
48.3
64.4
80.5
96.6
18 Mb/s
13.8
27.6
41.4
55.2
69
82.8
24 Mb/s
10.8
21.6
32.4
43.2
54
64.8
32 Mb/s
8.4
16.8
25.2
33.6
42
50.4
40 Mb/s
6.8
13.6
20.4
27.2
34
40.8
50 Mb/s
5.5
11
16.5
22
27.5
33
Storage capacity estimates in hours using 73 GB drives
13 May 2005
Video
Data Rate
5 Drives
10
Drives
15
Drives
20
Drives
25
Drives
30
Drives
4 Mb/s
76.6
153.2
229.9
306.4
383.1
459.6
8 Mb/s
51.4
102.8
154.4
205.6
257.3
308.4
12 Mb/s
38.7
77.4
116.1
154.8
193.5
232.2
15 Mb/s
32.6
65.3
97.9
130.5
163.1
195.7
24 Mb/s
22.2
44.3
66.4
88.6
110.7
132.9
30 Mb/s
18.2
36.5
54.7
72.9
91.1
109.4
40 Mb/s
14.1
28.1
42.2
56.2
70.3
84.3
50 Mb/s
11.4
22.9
34.3
45.7
57.1
68.5
65 Mb/s
8.8
17.6
26.3
35.1
43.9
52.6
Profile XP System Guide
69
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Determining maximum video data rate per channel
The maximum video data rate per channel depends on the number of video channels in
operation, the video data rate used, and the number of disk drives in the RAID storage
system. You can select the video data rate the Profile XP system uses to record the video
signal. For information on setting the video data rate, refer to “Selecting video quality
for a channel” on page 156.
When selecting video data rates, be sure not to exceed the total maximum system
bandwidth. Keep in mind that Fibre channel transfers, archive operations, off-speed
play, and high bandwidth recording or playout may require that you reduce the data rate
on other channels or operate fewer channels at one time. Although playout and recording
take priority over other operations, exceeding your Profile XP system bandwidth may
result in record or playback problems.
If you are unsure about maximum video data rate per channel or your Profile XP
available system bandwidth, consult your Grass Valley support representative. Be
prepared to supply the number of video channels, the usual bit rate, uncompressed VBI
usage, the number of audio channels, typical video network loads, and all the other
factors that are used to calculate maximum data per channel and the number of storage
disks required.
NOTE: The information in the following sections do not apply to Profile XP media
platforms connected to an Open SAN.
Connecting RAID chassis cabling
The Installation Guide for your PVS Series model provides complete information on
connecting your RAID storage chassis to the Profile XP system using both single and
redundant RAID controllers. It also describes how to set Fibre Channel Loop address
and Chassis ID for the RAID storage and the Expansion Chassis.
70
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Configuring RAID storage using GVG Disk Utility
Configuring RAID storage using GVG Disk Utility
After connecting the Fibre Channel RAID storage system to the Profile XP Media
Platform, you must use the GVG Disk Utility to bind the storage system’s disk modules
into logical units (LUNs) and create a video file system that is recognizable by the
Profile XP Media Platform.
This section includes the following:
• “About configuring storage” on page 72
• “Introducing the GVG Disk Utility” on page 75
• “Binding disks and creating a video file system” on page 77
• “Configuring hot spare drives” on page 83
• “Changing the video file system volume name” on page 85
• “Expanding storage” on page 87
• “Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration” on page 91
NOTE: If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN, disregard the
procedures in this section, and refer to the configuration instructions in the Open
SAN Instruction Manual.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
71
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
About configuring storage
This section describes terms and concepts related to configuring your the Fibre Channel
RAID storage system. Topics include:
• Binding disk modules
• Unbinding disk modules
• Creating a video file system
• Expanding Storage
• File system volume name
• Using Hot Spare drives
Binding disk modules
Binding the disk modules hardware formats them into a logical units called LUNs. The
disks that make up a LUN are accessed as a contiguous disk space. Disk modules must
be bound before they can be part of the video storage file system.
You can use the GVG Disk Utility to bind disks modules as Data LUNs (RAID-3
containing 4 data disks and 1 parity disk) or as hot spare LUNs, depending on the storage
needs of your system. Depending on the model, a RAID chassis can contain up to 10 or
15 drives.
For simplicity, the disk utility only allows binding contiguous disk modules into LUNs,
that is, in a ten disk chassis, disks 0-4 and 5-9 must be bound as two different LUNs. To
help in finding the physical location of disks in large systems, the disk utility includes
an Identify Disk button which allows the selected disk drive’s disk access light to flash.
After binding, disk modules become slot specific and cannot be moved to other disk
module slots.
Unbinding disk modules
Unbinding reverses the bind process. Unbinding might be needed when reconfiguring a
storage system, for example, when reconfiguring hot spare disks into a data LUN.
PFC500 and PFR700 storage systems allow unbinding LUNs independently. PFR500
and PFR600 storage systems enforce unbinding all LUNs simultaneously (i.e. clearing
the configuration).
!
CAUTION: Unbinding always destroys all user media files stored on the disk
modules.
Creating a video file system
The Fibre Channel RAID storage system must contain a video file system recognizable
by the Profile XP Media Platform system. When you choose to make a new video file
system, the Disk Utility creates one video file system using all available data LUNs. All
hot spare LUNs and Unbound LUNs are ignored.
!
72
CAUTION: Creating a video file system destroys the existing file system and all
user media files stored on the disk modules.
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
About configuring storage
Expanding Storage
You can expand storage by installing additional disk modules in empty disk slots or by
connecting additional Fibre Channel RAID Chassis or Expansion chassis. To use the
additional storage, you must bind the new disk modules and create a new video file
system.
The disk modules you use in a LUN must all have the same capacity to fully use the
modules’ disk space. The same applies to LUNs. Make sure all LUNs have the same
capacity to fully use the LUN’s disk space.
When redeploying an Expansion Chassis that was bound using a PFR500 or PFR600
RAID Controller Chassis, always use the GVG Disk Utility to unbind the disk modules
in the expansion chassis before disconnecting them from the original RAID Controller
chassis. Refer to “Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration” on page 91.
File system volume name
The video file system volume name is the logical name used when accessing the storage
system. All local and remote Profile XP applications use the volume name when
referencing the video file system.
You can change the video file system volume name at any time without affecting the
media files stored on the system. Changing the volume name may be required with some
third party Profile XP control software which requires a specific volume name.
Using Hot Spare drives
You can bind disks as hot spare drives. Hot spare drives are on standby and are used in
the event of a drive failure in a data LUN. If a drive fails, the RAID Controller
automatically selects a hot spare drive to use in place of the failed drive. This prevents
the system from operating in a degraded state, ensuring there are always 5 disks in the
RAID-3 LUN keeping the data LUN in a protected mode. See “Configuring hot spare
drives” on page 83.
The following table describes how your RAID system will respond when the failed drive
is replaced.
a
13 May 2005
RAID Storage Models
How this system handles the replacement drive
PFC500
The replacement disk drive module is rebuilt, and the hot spare drive reverts to
“hot spare” status.
PFR500a
The replacement drive becomes a hot spare drive. The original hot spare drive
remains a permanent member of the LUN.
PFR600a
The replacement disk module is in a “free state”. The hot spare drive remains a
member of the LUN. You must use the GVG Disk Utility to bind the
replacement drive as a hot spare drive to make it available.
PFC700
The replacement disk drive module is rebuilt, and the hot spare drive reverts to
“hot spare” status.
Since hot spare drives remain members of the LUN, disk modules in a LUN can become physically separated in time.
Before replacing a failed disk module, always use the GVG Disk Utility to physically identify it.
Profile XP System Guide
73
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
If the drives you want to designate as hot spares are bound as part of a data LUN, you
must unbind the drives first, then bind them as hot spares. (Refer to “Unbinding LUNs
for reconfiguration” on page 91.) You can configure any disk in the array as a hot spare
drive, however, hot spare drives are available only to RAID Controller to which they are
connected.
74
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Introducing the GVG Disk Utility
Introducing the GVG Disk Utility
This section includes the following:
• GVG Disk Utility user interface overview
• Checking storage subsystem status
GVG Disk Utility user interface overview
The GVG Disk Utility user interface includes a tree view in the left-hand pane, and a
status information area displayed in the right-hand pane. The tree view displays the
hardware that make up the storage system connected. The context menus in the tree view
are used to configure storage. The right-hand status pane displays information about the
item selected in the tree view. The tree view hierarchy is as follows:
RAID Controller Model - Provides
a logical grouping of RAID chassis models, i.e.
all PFR500 RAID Controller Chassis connected are listed under the PFR500 icon.
- Represents the RAID Controllers found. These are numbered in the
order discovered. The controller icon represents both RAID Controller A and, if
installed, RAID Controller B. To determine if an optional RAID Controller B is
installed, select the Controller icon in the tree view, then examine the status pane
for peer status.
Controller
Bound LUNs
- Expanding the Bound node displays all bound LUNs.
LUN - Represents
a bound LUN. Expanding the LUN node displays the disk
modules that make up the LUN.
UnBound disks
- Expanding the UnBound node, displays all unbound disk
modules.
Disks -
Represents the disk modules.
RAID Controller
Model
Controller Node
(Both A and B,
if installed)
Bound LUNs
LUN
UnBound Disks
Subsystem
Status Pane
(displays status of the selected item)
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
75
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Checking storage subsystem status
NetCentral monitoring software is available to monitor your Profile XP media platform
and the attached RAID storage system, however, some limited status information for
storage subsystems is displayed in the GVG Disk Utility. This can be helpful when
configuring storage.
You can view status information by selecting these items in the tree view.
• Storage Model
• Controller
• Bound
• LUN
• Disk
76
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Binding disks and creating a video file system
Binding disks and creating a video file system
Before you can use your Profile XP system, you must create a video file system on the
Fibre Channel RAID Storage Chassis using the GVG Disk Utility.
Creating a video file system involves:
• Setting the RAID Controller Fibre Channel ID (PFR500s only)
• Binding any unbound disk modules
• Creating and naming the file system
NOTE: Make sure you allow adequate time for binding disk modules into LUNs.
PFR500 and PFR600 controllers bind each LUN in turn, but take less than a
minute for each LUN. PFC500 and PFR700 controllers bind multiple LUNs at the
same time, yet take more than an hour to bind a LUN. Large drive capacities and
multiple LUNs can increase the binding time to 10 hours or more.
NOTE: If you want to use hot spare drives in your system, refer to the procedures
in “Configuring hot spare drives” on page 83.
To create a video file system:
1. Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start |
Programs | Profile Applications | Configuration Manager.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
77
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
2. In Configuration Manager, click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility.
3. If you are configuring a PFR500 or PFR600 storage system, perform the following
steps to set the Fibre Channel ID, otherwise, proceed to step 4.
a. Expand the tree view and right-click the Controller0 icon under PFR500 or
PFR600, then select Set Fibre Channel ID in the context menu.
b. In the Set Fibre Channel ID dialog box, enter IDs as shown, then click OK.
c. Click OK in the Operation Successful dialog box.
d. Reboot the PFR500 or PFR600 RAID storage system and the Profile XP media
platform using the “System reboot procedure” on page 94, then proceed to
step e.
78
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Binding disks and creating a video file system
e. On the Profile XP media platform, start Configuration Manager using the
desktop shortcut or by selecting Start | Programs | Profile Applications |
Configuration Manager.
f. In Configuration Manager, click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility.
4. Expand the tree view and identify bound LUNs and unbound disks by their
placement in the hierarchy of the tree view.
5. If there are unbound disks displayed in the tree view, you must perform the
following steps, otherwise, proceed to step 6.
a. To bind unbound disks, right-click the Unbound node for a controller, then select
Bind LUNs in the context menu. (Peer controllers that share the same set of disks
are automatically selected as a pair.)
The Binding LUN… dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the
controller listed in the Available Disk list.
b. Select RAID 3 using the LUN TYPE drop-down box.
c. Select five contiguous disks, then click the add button
to add them to the
Selected Disks list. (TIP: Use ‘shift-click’ or ‘control-click’ to select disks.)
NOTE: As an aid in identifying a disk module’s physical location, select it in the
Selected Disks list, then click Identify Disks. This causes the disk drive LED to flash.
d. Click OK to close the Binding LUN… dialog box and begin the binding process.
The Progress Report dialog box opens, showing the status of the binding
process.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
79
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
e. Repeat step a through step d for all unbound disks on all remaining controllers
displayed in the tree view.
PFR500 and PFR600 controllers take less than a minute to bind a LUN, but can
bind only one LUN at a time. You must wait until binding is completed before
binding the next LUN. PFC500 and PFR700 controllers take more than an hour
to bind a LUN, but allow multiple binding processes at the same time.
f. Upon 100% completion, click Close in Progress Report window.
Do not proceed until all LUNs are finished binding.
g. Restart the Windows operating system on the Profile XP Media Platform.
h. Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start |
Programs | Profile Applications | Configuration Manager.
i. In Configuration Manager, click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility.
6. In the GVG Disk Utility main menu, click Tools | Make File System. The File
System wizard appears.
80
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Binding disks and creating a video file system
7. Enter a volume name or accept the default name, then click Next.
8. Select Yes, create a file system using all RAID3 LUNs, then click Finish.
9. Click OK, in the warning message box. The Progress Report window appears
showing the create file system task status.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
81
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
10. When the reboot message appears, click OK to restart the Profile XP Media
Platform.
Afterward, the storage system is ready for record/play operation.
82
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Configuring hot spare drives
Configuring hot spare drives
When you configure storage, you can designate hot spare drives. For more information
about hot spares, see “Using Hot Spare drives” on page 73.
If the drives you want to designate as hot spares are bound as part of a data LUN, you
must unbind the drives first, then bind them as hot spares. (Refer to “Unbinding LUNs
for reconfiguration” on page 91.)
To bind drives as hot spare drives:
1. Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start |
Programs | Profile Applications | Configuration Manager.
2. In Configuration Manager, click File System in the Configuration Manager
window. The GVG Disk Utility appears.
3. To bind unbound disks as hot spares, right-click the Unbound node for a controller,
then select Bind LUNs in the context menu. (Peer controllers that share the same set
of disks are automatically selected as a pair.)
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
83
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
The Binding LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller
listed in the Available Disk list.
4. Select Hot Spare using the LUN TYPE drop-down box.
5. Select the disk(s) to be used as hot spares, then click the add button
them to the Selected Disks list.
to add
NOTE: As an aid in identifying a disk module’s physical location, select it in the
Selected Disks list, then click Identify Disks. This causes the disk drive LED to flash.
6. Click OK to close the Binding LUN… dialog box and begin the binding process.
The Progress Report dialog box opens, showing the status of the binding process.
7. Repeat step 3 through step 6 to bind additional hot spare disks modules on other
controllers as needed.
8. Upon 100% completion, click Close in Progress Report window.
84
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Changing the video file system volume name
9. Reboot the Windows operating system on the Profile XP media platform.
10. If you have not created a video file system on the remaining disks, refer to “Binding
disks and creating a video file system” on page 77.
Changing the video file system volume name
You can change the video file system volume name at any time without affecting the
media files stored on the system. Changing the volume name may be required with some
third party Profile XP control software which requires a specific volume name.
To change the file system volume name:
1. Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start |
Programs | Profile Applications | Configuration Manager.
2. In Configuration Manager, click File System to start GVG Disk Utility.
3. In GVG Disk Utility, click Tools | Make File System. The File System wizard
appears.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
85
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
4. Enter a new volume name, then click Next.
5. Select No, set the volume name only, then click Finish. The Progress Report window
appears showing the change volume name task status.
6. Upon 100% completion, click Close in Progress Report window. Be sure to restart
applications that access disk storage on the Profile XP system.
86
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Expanding storage
Expanding storage
You can expand storage by installing additional disk modules in empty disk slots or by
connecting additional storage chassis. To use the additional storage, you must bind
unbound LUNs and create a new video file system which includes the new disk modules.
!
CAUTION: Back up all media on existing drives before creating a new video file
system. Creating a new video file system destroys all media files and other data on
the disk modules.
If you are adding additional storage chassis, refer to the Installation Guide for your
Profile XP Media Platform to make hardware connections, then return to this procedure
to configure the storage system.
To create a video file system on expanded storage:
1. Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start |
Programs | Profile Applications | Configuration Manager.
2. In Configuration Manager, click File System to start GVG Disk Utility.
3. Expand the tree view and identify bound LUNs and unbound disks by their
placement in the hierarchy of the tree view.
4. If there are unbound LUNs displayed in the tree view, you must perform the
following steps, otherwise, proceed to step f.
a. To bind unbound disks, right-click the Unbound node for a controller, then select
Bind LUNs in the context menu. (Peer controllers that share the same set of disks
are automatically selected as a pair.)
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
87
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
The Binding LUN… dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the
controller listed in the Available Disk list.
b. Select RAID 3 using the LUN TYPE drop-down box.
c. Select five contiguous disks, then click the add button
to add them to the
Selected Disks list. (TIP: Use ‘shift-click’ or ‘control-click’ to select disks.)
NOTE: As an aid in identifying a disk module’s physical location, select it in the
Selected Disks list, then click Identify Disks. This causes the disk drive LED to flash.
d. Click OK to close the Binding LUN… dialog box and begin the binding process.
The Progress Report dialog box opens, showing the status of the binding
process.
e. Repeat step a through step d for all unbound disks on all remaining controllers
displayed in the tree view.
NOTE: PFR500 and PFR600 controllers take less than a minute to bind a LUN,
but can bind only one LUN at a time. You must wait until binding is completed
before binding the next LUN. PFC500 and PFCR700 controllers take more than
an hour to bind a LUN, but allow multiple binding processes at the same time.
88
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Expanding storage
f. Upon 100% completion, click Close in Progress Report window.
Do not proceed until all LUNs are finished binding.
g. Restart the Windows operating system on the Profile XP Media Platform.
h. Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start |
Programs | Profile Applications | Configuration Manager.
i. In Configuration Manager, click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility.
5. In the GVG Disk Utility main menu, click Tools | Make File System. The File
System wizard appears.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
89
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
6. Enter a volume name or accept the default name, then click Next.
7. Select Yes, create a file system using all RAID3 LUNs, then click Finish.
8. Click OK, in the warning message box. The Progress Report window appears
showing the create file system task status.
90
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration
9. Upon 100% completion, click Close in Progress Report window.
10. When the reboot message appears, click OK, then reboot the Windows operating
system on the Profile XP media platform. Afterward, the system is ready for
operation.
Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration
Unbinding may be necessary to reconfigure the disk modules in the RAID storage
system. You must unbind a LUN before you can bind the disk modules in a different
configuration.
When redeploying an Expansion Chassis that was bound using a PFR500 or PFR600
RAID Controller Chassis, always use the GVG Disk Utility to unbind the disk modules
in the expansion chassis before disconnecting them from the original RAID Controller
chassis.
!
CAUTION: Unbinding destroys all user media files stored on the disk modules.
This section includes the following procedures:
• Unbinding LUNs: PFC500 and PFR700 Storage Systems
• Unbinding LUNs: PFR500 and PFR600 Storage Systems
Unbinding LUNs: PFC500 and PFR700 Storage Systems
If you need to unbind LUNs, perform the following:
1. Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start |
Programs | Profile Applications | Configuration Manager.
2. In Configuration Manager, click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility.
3. Expand the tree view and identify bound LUNs.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
91
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
4. Right-click the Bound node or a LUN you want to unbind, then select Unbind LUNs
in the context menu. The Unbinding LUN… dialog box opens.
5. On receiving the warning message, click OK.
6. Move LUNs to the Selected LUNs box using the arrow buttons. (HINT: To select
all LUNs, use Shift + click, then click the >> arrow button.).
7. Click OK to close the Unbinding LUN… dialog box and begin the unbinding
process. The Progress Report dialog box opens, displaying a unbind status.
8. Repeat step 4 through step 7 to unbind LUNs on additional controllers, if needed.
9. Upon 100% completion, click Close in the Progress Report dialog box.
This completes the unbind procedure.
Unbinding LUNs: PFR500 and PFR600 Storage Systems
PFR500 and PFR600 RAID controllers do not allow unbinding individual LUNs. You
must unbind all LUNs to reconfigure your storage system.
!
CAUTION: In this release, you must use Unbind All LUNs in the Controller context
menu. Do not use the Unbind LUN entry in any other context menu.
To unbind LUNs, perform the following:
1. Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start |
Programs | Profile Applications | Configuration Manager.
2. In Configuration Manager, click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility.
3. Expand the tree view to identify bound LUNs.
4. Right-click the Controller icon, then select Unbind All LUNs in the context menu.
The unbind all LUN operation begins.
5. On receiving the warning message, click OK.
6. On receiving the “Operation Successful” message, click OK.
This completes the unbind procedure. You can now bind disk modules in a new
configuration as required.
92
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Performing RAID storage maintenance using GVG Disk Utility
Performing RAID storage maintenance
using GVG Disk Utility
The maintenance procedures for your RAID storage system include the following:
• “System reboot procedure” on page 94
• “Checking RAID controller microcode version” on page 95
• “Loading RAID controller microcode: All models” on page 96
• “Identifying disk modules prior to removal” on page 98
• “Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks” on page 100
• “Performing PFR600 maintenance tasks” on page 107
• “Performing PFR700 maintenance tasks” on page 113
• “Resetting the PFC500 system clock” on page 117
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
93
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
System reboot procedure
Some RAID storage maintenance procedures require rebooting the RAID storage system
and Profile XP Media Platform. Use the following procedure when a reboot is required.
NOTE: If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN, disregard this
procedure, and refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for
shutting down the Open SAN.
1. Power-off the RAID storage system by powering-off the RAID Controller chassis
prior to, or at the same time as the RAID Expansion chassis.
!
CAUTION: You must always power off the PFR500 RAID Controller chassis prior
to, or at the same time as the PFR500E Expansion Chassis. Failure to do so may
force some LUNs offline. This will cause loss of access to the media file system
when the system is powered on again. Refer to “Forcing LUNs online: Recovery
from improper power-off sequence” on page 103.
2. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the disk drives to spin down, then power-on all
RAID Expansion chassis, then all RAID Controller chassis.
NOTE: Always power-on the RAID Expansion chassis prior to, or at the same time
as the RAID Controller chassis.
3. Wait for RAID storage initialization, as follows:
- PFR 700 RAID Storage systems - Wait until the Ready LED on the RAID
controller is steady green— approximately 2 minutes. The wait is approximately
5 minutes for the first reboot after a firmware download. (Refer to the PFR700
Instruction Manual to interpret other LED behavior.)
- PFR 600 RAID Storage systems - Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady
green— approximately 1 minute. The rear panel 7-segment LED displays the
chassis address. (Refer to the PFR 600 Instruction Manual to interpret other disk
access LED or 7-segment LED behavior.)
- PFR 500 RAID Storage systems - Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady
green and the HOST RDY LED is illuminated — approximately 4 minutes. The
rear panel 7-segment LED displays the chassis address. (Refer to the PFR 500
Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or 7-segment LED
behavior.)
- PFC 500 RAID Storage systems - Wait until the System Check LED is off and
all disk access LEDs are steady green— approximately 2 minutes. (Refer to the
PFC500 Instruction Manual to interpret other front panel LED behavior.)
4. On the Profile XP Media Platform, shutdown and restart the Windows operating
system. Wait for auto-logon, or refer to “Logging on Windows NT” on page 44.
94
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Checking RAID controller microcode version
Checking RAID controller microcode version
To determine RAID controller microcode version:
1. Start GVG Disk Utility, then select a controller node in the tree view.
NOTE: Redundant controllers, which share the same set of disks, are displayed in
GVG Disk Utility as a single controller, and the microcode version is reported for
the pair.
2. The controller microcode version is displayed in the right-hand pane.
To upgrade microcode, refer to “Loading RAID controller microcode: All models”
on page 96.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
95
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Loading RAID controller microcode: All models
If you upgrade your Profile system software, you may be instructed in the software
release notes to upgrade the RAID Controller microcode on all the RAID chassis. This
allows you to take advantage of the RAID enhancements and benefit from improved
reliability.
To upgrade RAID Controller microcode:
1. In the GVG Disk Utility, do one of the following:
• To upgrade a single RAID controller chassis, right-click a controller in the tree
view, then select Advanced | Load Microcode. Redundant controllers that share
the same set of disks are automatically selected and upgraded as a pair.
• To upgrade all RAID controllers chassis, right-click the RAID model node in the
tree view, such as the PFC500 or PFR600 icon, then select Load Microcode.
Redundant controllers that share the same set of disks are upgraded as a pair.
The Open dialog box appears.
2. In the Open dialog box, locate the c:\profile\microcode directory, then select the
latest controller microcode file for your controller. Refer to the following table.
a
RAID Model
Microcode File Types
PFC500
.bin
PFR500
.ima
PFR600a
fs2200<version#>.bin (RAID controller microcode)
app<version#>.bin (LBB microcode)
PFR700
.bin
PFR 600 RAID controller microcode upgrades may include two firmware files; RAID
controller microcode and LBB microcode. See step 4.
3. Click Open.
4. If you are upgrading a model PFR600 RAID controller, continue with the
following steps; for all other models, skip to step 5.
a. The Open dialog box is displayed again; this time select the latest LBB
microcode file (app<version#>.bin), then click Open.
b. Click OK to confirm download.
c. Click OK to start the download.
5. The Progress Report window appears showing the microcode upgrade task and the
percentage completion.
NOTE: Progress remains at 0% until completed.
96
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Loading RAID controller microcode: All models
6. On 100% completion, perform one of the following steps:
• If PFR 600 or PFR 700 chassis with redundant controllers - The RAID
storage is ready for operation. Proceed to step 7.
• All other models - Power cycle the RAID controller chassis, then restart the
Profile XP Media Platform.
Refer to “System reboot procedure” on page 94.
NOTE: If your RAID chassis is part of an Open SAN, refer to the instructions in
the Open SAN Instruction Manual for power-off and power-on procedures.
7. It is recommended that you create labeling for the controller’s rear panel indicating
the current microcode version.
This completes the RAID controller firmware upgrade.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
97
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Identifying disk modules prior to removal
The Disk Utility Identify feature allows you to flash the disk access LEDs so that you can
physically locate a specific disk module or group of disk modules that make up a LUN.
Always use the disk identify feature before removing and replacing a failed disk module.
Accidentally removing the wrong disk module can destroy all media on the disk drives.
This is especially important in Open SAN systems that contain both PFR500 and
PFR600 RAID chassis since they indicate disk failures differently. The PFR500 chassis
indicates a disk failure by turning the failed disk access LED green while the remaining
disk LEDs become blue. The PFR600 chassis indicates a disk failure by turning the
failed disk access LED blue while the remaining disk LEDs remain green.
To identify the disks in a LUN
1. Right-click the LUN icon in the tree view, then select Identify Disks in the context
menu.
2. Perform one of the following steps:
- For PFR500 systems, click OK to identify disk modules in the selected LUN.
Disk modules remain identified for 30 seconds. You can locate the disk modules
now.
- For PFR600 systems, locate the disk modules now by locating the flashing blue
disk module LEDs. Click OK to extinguish the LEDs.
- For PFC500 and PFR700 systems, locate the disk modules now by locating the
flashing amber LEDs. Click OK to extinguish the flashing LED.
98
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Identifying disk modules prior to removal
To identify a disk module
1. Right-click the disk icon in the tree view, then select Identify Disk in the context
menu.
2. Perform one of the following steps:
- For PFR500 systems, click OK to identify disk modules in the selected LUN.
Disk modules remain identified for 30 seconds. You can locate the disk modules
now.
- For PFR600 systems, locate the disk module now by locating the flashing blue
LED. Click OK to extinguish the LED.
- For PFC500 and PFR700 systems, locate the disk modules now by locating the
flashing amber LEDs. Click OK to extinguish the flashing LED.
This concludes the disk identification procedure.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
99
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks
PFR500 maintenance tasks include:
• “Downloading PFR500 disk drive firmware” on page 100
• “Disk firmware download: Alternate procedure” on page 101
• “Forcing LUNs online: Recovery from improper power-off sequence” on page
103
• “Forcing a replacement drive to rebuild” on page 103
• “Starting and Stopping disk initialization” on page 104
• “Checking and restoring default PFR500 RAID Controller settings” on page
104
• “Checking PFR500 disk settings” on page 106
• “Restoring PFR500 disk settings” on page 106
Downloading PFR500 disk drive firmware
When upgrading your Profile XP System Software, you may be instructed in the
software release notes to upgrade the PFR500 disk drive firmware. This allows you to
take advantage of the disk drive enhancements and benefit from improved performance
and reliability.
To determine your disk drive type and current firmware version, select a disk drive icon
in the GVG Disk Utility tree view, then note the drive properties reported in the
right-hand pane. Use the following procedure if you need to download disk drive
firmware.
NOTE: The disk drives on each controller are upgraded one at a time which can
take as long as 2 minutes per drive. Also, the Disk Utility allows selecting multiple
controllers for disk firmware upgrades, however, upgrades are handled one
controller at a time. Take this into consideration when scheduling the upgrade.
To download disk drive firmware:
1. In the GVG Disk Utility, right-click a controller in the tree view, then select
Advanced | Download Disk Firmware in the context menu.
2. In the Open dialog box, locate the c:\profile\microcode directory, then select the
latest .lod file for your disk drive type.
For example, use:
Use Ciprico_Seagate73LP_<version #>.lod for 73GB Seagate drives
Use Ciprico_Seagate181HH_<version #>.lod for 180G Seagate drives
Where <version #> specifies the firmware version number.
To determine drive type and current firmware version, select a drive in the tree
view, then note the drive properties reported in the right-hand pane.
100
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks
3. Click Open. The Progress Report window appears showing the disk firmware
download task and the percentage completion. (Disk access LED behavior:
flashing green during download; off during disk reboot; flashing green during disk
initialization.)
NOTE: If you receive a warning that some disks failed to download, make note of
the disk numbers, then proceed to “Disk firmware download: Alternate procedure”
on page 101 to recover from this condition and complete the firmware upgrade.
4. Perform step 1 through step 3 to upgrade disk drives for the remaining controllers.
5. After successfully downloading disk firmware, use the following steps to restore
default disk settings. This is required after downloading disk firmware.
a. Right-click the controller in the tree view, then select Restore Disk Settings in
the context menu. The hour glass appears while the operation is performed. This
takes several seconds.
b. On receiving “Operation Successful” message, click OK.
c. Repeat step a and step b for remaining controllers.
6. Reboot the RAID storage and the Profile XP media platform using the “System
reboot procedure” on page 94.
NOTE: If your PFR500 is part of an Open SAN, disregard the previous step, and
refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering-off and
powering-on the Open SAN.
This concludes the Loading Disk Firmware procedure.
Disk firmware download: Alternate procedure
NOTE: Perform this procedure only when you receive a warning that some disks
failed to download while performing the procedure “Downloading PFR500 disk
drive firmware” on page 100.
In some cases, rebooting the PFR500 RAID Controller chassis results in successful disk
firmware upgrades for disks that report a download error. If disks still fail to upgrade,
you can download firmware to a single disk. After all disk are upgraded, you must
restore disk settings.
To upgrade firmware for remaining disks and restore disk settings:
1. Reboot the RAID storage and Profile XP media platform using the “System reboot
procedure” on page 94.
NOTE: If your PFR500 is part of an Open SAN, disregard the previous step, and
refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering-off and
powering-on the Open SAN.
2. Use the following steps to verify the firmware version on all disks:
a. In the GVG Disk Utility, select a disk icon, and note the drive firmware version,
the repeat for all disk drives.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
101
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
b. If the firmware version is correct for all disks, proceed to step 4 to restore disk
settings, otherwise, continue with step 3.
NOTE: In some systems, disk status is reported as “failed” until disk settings are
restored using step 4, which follows. For now, you can safely disregard the failed
status.
3. Download firmware to individual disk drives, as follows:
a. In Disk Utility, right-click a disk icon, then select Advanced | Download
Firmware in the context menu.
b. In the Open dialog box, locate the c:\profile\microcode directory, then select the
.lod file for your disk drive type.
For example, use:
Use Ciprico_Seagate73LP_<version #>.lod for 73GB Seagate drives
Use Ciprico_Seagate181HH_<version #>.lod for 180G Seagate drives
Where <version #> specifies the firmware version number. Seagate uses
hexadecimal to specify disk firmware versions.
c. Click Open. The Progress Report window appears showing the disk firmware
upgrade task and the percentage completion. (Disk access LED behavior:
flashing green during download; off during disk reboot; flashing green during
disk initialization.)
NOTE: If a disk fails to download, try waiting 3 minutes, then try again.
d. Repeat step a through step c for remaining disks that failed download.
4. After successfully downloading disk firmware, restore disk settings. This is always
required after downloading disk firmware.
a. Right-click the controller in the tree view, then select Restore Disk Settings in
the context menu. The hour glass appears while the operation is performed. This
takes several seconds.
b. On receiving “Operation Successful” message, click OK.
5. Reboot the RAID storage and Profile XP media platform using the “System reboot
procedure” on page 94.
NOTE: If your PFR500 is part of an Open SAN, disregard the previous step, and
refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering-off and
powering-on the Open SAN.
6. Start your control application, and verify access to the media file system.
102
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks
Forcing LUNs online: Recovery from improper power-off sequence
You must always power-off the PFR500 RAID Controller chassis prior to, or at the same
time as the PFR500E Expansion Chassis. Failure to do so may force some LUNs offline.
This will cause loss of access to the media file system when the system is powered on
again.
Offline LUNs can be recovered without the loss of the media file system using the GVG
Disk Utility. In Disk Utility, offline LUNs appear under the Bound node in the tree view,
however, LUN status is offline.
To force LUNs online using GVG Disk Utility:
1. In GVG Disk Utility, expand the tree view under the controller icon to view all
bound LUNs.
2. Determine which LUNs are offline by selecting each LUN and noting the LUN
status displayed in the right-hand pane.
3. Force LUNs online using the following steps:
a. In the GVG Disk Utility, right-click an offline LUN, then select Advanced |
Force Online in the context menu.
b. On receiving operation successful message, click OK.
NOTE: Do not refresh the display at this time.
4. Repeat step 3 for all offline LUNs.
5. Select View | Refresh in the main menu to refresh the display, then select each LUN,
and verify status is “Online”.
6. Reboot the RAID storage and Profile XP media platform using the “System reboot
procedure” on page 94.
NOTE: If your PFR500 is part of an Open SAN, disregard the previous step, and
refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering-off and
powering-on the Open SAN.
Forcing a replacement drive to rebuild
In the event of a disk drive failure, you’ll repair the system by replacing the disk module
as soon as possible. Sometimes, after installing the replacement disk module, the drive
status is reported as “failed”. In this case, you must use the Disk Utility to force the new
drive to rebuild.
To force a replacement drive to rebuild:
1. In the GVG Disk Utility, expand the tree view to view the LUN containing the
replacement disk module.
2. Right-click the replacement disk icon in the tree view, then select Advanced | Force
Rebuild in the context menu. The rebuild process begins. You can verify this by
checking the drive status reported in the Disk Utility and the disk module LEDs.
On completion, the drive status changes from “rebuild” to “online”. You may need
to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
103
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Starting and Stopping disk initialization
Initializing the disk array aligns the physical disk drive heads and, where applicable, sets
the striping and parity across the disk drives in a newly created logical unit. It takes a
very long time to complete and is rarely needed. Initialize disk modules only when
instructed to do so by Grass Valley product support.
Checking and restoring default PFR500 RAID Controller settings
RAID Controller settings are checked every time the GVG Disk Utility is started. When
the Disk Utility starts, you may receive a warning message stating that current RAID
controller settings are not set to the defaults required by the current Profile XP software
or Fiber Channel SCSI software installed. If you do not receive the message, your
controller settings are correct.
To check and restore PFR500 RAID controller settings:
1. Start GVG Disk Utility, then perform one of the following steps:
- If you receive an “incorrect” RAID Controller settings message when GVG
Disk Utility opens, continue with step 2 which follows.
- If you do not receive an “incorrect” RAID Controller settings message when
GVG Disk Utility opens, your settings are correct.
2. In the “incorrect” settings message box, click OK to restore default settings.
104
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks
3. On receiving operation successful message, click OK.
RAID Controller status is now reported as “Correct” in the right-hand status pane.
4. Reboot the RAID storage and Profile XP media platform using the “System reboot
procedure” on page 94.
NOTE: If your PFR500 is part of an Open SAN, disregard the previous step, and
refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering-off and
powering-on the Open SAN.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
105
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Checking PFR500 disk settings
You can check disk drive settings to verify that they are set to factory default and are
appropriate for operation in Profile XP installations.
To check disk drive settings:
1. In the GVG Disk Utility tree view, right-click the RAID Controller node, then
select Advanced | Check Disk Settings in the context menu.
2. On receiving a message, click OK.
Settings are reported as “correct” or “incorrect”. If disk settings are reported as
incorrect, refer to “Restoring PFR500 disk settings” on page 106.
Restoring PFR500 disk settings
If for any reason, the disk drive settings are inappropriate for operation in Profile XP
installations, they must be restored to default. To check disk drive settings, refer to
“Checking PFR500 disk settings” on page 106.
To restore disk drive settings:
1. In the GVG Disk Utility tree view, right-click the RAID Controller node, then
select Advanced | Restore Disk Settings in the context menu.
2. On receiving an operation successful message, click OK.
All disk settings are now correct.
3. Reboot the RAID storage and Profile XP media platform using the “System reboot
procedure” on page 94.
NOTE: If your PFR500 is part of an Open SAN, disregard the previous step, and
refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering-off and
powering-on the Open SAN.
106
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Performing PFR600 maintenance tasks
Performing PFR600 maintenance tasks
PFR600 maintenance tasks include:
• “Downloading PFR600 disk drive firmware” on page 107
• “Replacing a failed disk module” on page 108
• “Starting disk rebuild manually” on page 108
• “Starting and Stopping disk initialization” on page 109
• “Checking and restoring default PFR600 RAID Controller settings” on page
109
• “Disabling a PFR600 RAID controller for removal” on page 110
• “Enabling a PFR600 RAID controller” on page 111
• “Disabling a PFR600 disk module for removal” on page 112
Downloading PFR600 disk drive firmware
When upgrading your Profile XP System Software, you may be instructed in the
software release notes to upgrade the PFR600 disk drive firmware. This allows you to
take advantage of the disk drive enhancements and benefit from improved performance
and reliability.
To determine your disk drive type and current firmware version, select a disk drive icon
in the GVG Disk Utility tree view, then note the drive properties reported in the
right-hand pane. Use the following procedure if you need to download disk drive
firmware.
NOTE: The disk drives on each controller are upgraded one at a time which can
take as long as 2 minutes per drive. Also, the Disk Utility allows selecting multiple
controllers for disk firmware upgrades, however, upgrades are handled one
controller at a time. Take this into consideration when scheduling the upgrade.
To download disk drive firmware:
1. In the GVG Disk Utility, right-click a controller in the tree view, then select
Advanced | Download Firmware in the context menu.
NOTE: You can download firmware to a single disk by right-clicking a disk icon in
the tree view.
2. In the Open dialog box, locate the c:\profile\microcode directory, then select the
latest .lod file for your disk drive type.
For example, use:
Use Ciprico_Seagate73LP_<version #>.lod for 73GB Seagate drives
Use Ciprico_Seagate181HH_<version #>.lod for 180G Seagate drives
Where <version #> specifies the firmware version number.
To determine drive type and current firmware version, select a drive in the tree
view, then note the drive properties reported in the right-hand pane.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
107
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
3. Click Open.
The Progress Report window appears showing the disk firmware download task
and the percentage completion. (Disk access LED behavior: flashing green during
download; off during disk reboot; flashing green during disk initialization.)
4. Perform step 1 through step 3 to upgrade disk drives for the remaining controllers.
5. When finished, reboot the RAID storage and the Profile XP Media Platform. Refer
to “System reboot procedure” on page 94.
NOTE: If your PFR600 is part of an Open SAN, disregard the previous step, and
refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering-off and
powering-on the Open SAN.
This concludes the Loading Disk Firmware procedure.
Replacing a failed disk module
In the event of a disk drive failure, you’ll repair the system by replacing the disk module
as soon as possible. Refer to the PFR600 Instruction Manual for information on
removing and replacing disk modules.
NOTE: Always use GVG Disk Utility to physically identify the failed disk module.
Accidently removing the wrong disk module can destroy all media on the disk
drives. See “Identifying disk modules prior to removal” on page 3-98.
On inserting the replacement disk module, the RAID controller automatically starts
rebuilding the drive. You can verify rebuild status by looking at the disk access LED on
the front of the disk module, or by checking disk status in GVG Disk Utility.
To check disk status in GVG Disk Utility, select the disk module icon in the device tree.
Status is reported in the right-hand pane. On completion, the disk drive status changes
from Rebuilding to Online. You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display.
Starting disk rebuild manually
You may need to start disk rebuild manually in the following cases:
• If a disk rebuild is interrupted for any reason, such as, a controller failover or
power interruption, you must start rebuild again manually. Failed rebuilds do not
resume automatically.
• If you manually disable a disk before removing it (see “Disabling a PFR600 disk
module for removal” on page 112), you must manually start rebuild after the
disk module is replaced.
To start disk rebuild manually:
1. In GVG Disk Utility, right-click the LUN icon for the affected LUN, then select
Advanced | Start Rebuild.
2. To check rebuild status, do one of the following:
• Select the replacement disk icon in GVG Disk Utility, then view the disk status
in the right-hand pane. You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display.
On completion, the drive status changes from Rebuilding to Online.
108
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Performing PFR600 maintenance tasks
• Open the Progress dialog box by selecting View | Progress Report.
Starting and Stopping disk initialization
Initializing the disk array aligns the physical disk drive heads and, where applicable, sets
the striping and parity across the disk drives in a newly created logical unit. It takes a
very long time to complete and is rarely needed. Initialize disk modules only when
instructed to do so by Grass Valley product support.
Checking and restoring default PFR600 RAID Controller settings
RAID Controller settings are checked every time the GVG Disk Utility is started. When
the Disk Utility starts, you may receive a warning message stating that current RAID
controller settings are not set to the defaults required by the current Profile XP software
or Fiber Channel SCSI software installed. If you do not receive the message, your
controller settings are correct.
To check and restore PFR600 RAID controller settings:
1. Start GVG Disk Utility, then perform one of the following steps:
- If you receive an “incorrect” RAID Controller settings message when GVG
Disk Utility opens, continue with step 2 which follows.
- If you do not receive an “incorrect” RAID Controller settings message when
GVG Disk Utility opens, your settings are correct.
2. In the “incorrect” settings message box, click OK to restore default settings.
3. On receiving operation successful message, click OK.
RAID Controller status is now reported as “Correct” in the right-hand status pane.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
109
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Disabling a PFR600 RAID controller for removal
This feature is provided for PFR600 RAID chassis that have redundant RAID controller
modules installed. In the event that one of the RAID controllers appears operational, but
also reports faults through various log files and status indicators, you can choose to
disable the controller and replace it. Disabling the controller and removing it in this way
avoids interruptions in signal output that can occur if the module fails or if it is simply
hot swapped while it is the active controller. When the replacement RAID controller
module is installed, it is automatically enabled and becomes the backup controller.
NOTE: Refer to the PFR600 Instruction Manual for procedures on removing and
replacing the RAID controller module.
To disable a controller:
1. Start the GVG Disk Utility.
2. Expand the tree view to display the controllers.
3. Right-click a controller icon in the tree view, then select Advanced | Disable A
Controller or Disable B Controller.
110
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Performing PFR600 maintenance tasks
4. Click OK to continue.
The RAID controller is disabled. You can check controller status in the Disk
Utility. You may need to refresh the display.
5. Remove and replace the disabled RAID controller module.
Refer to procedures in the PFR600 Instruction Manual.
6. On inserting the replacement RAID controller, it initializes and is automatically
enabled to become the “backup” RAID controller.
This concludes the Disabling a PFR600 RAID controller for removal procedure.
NOTE: If you accidentally disable the wrong controller, you can enable it again.
Refer to Enabling a PFR600 RAID controller.
Enabling a PFR600 RAID controller
This feature is provided in case you accidentally disable the wrong RAID Controller in
“Disabling a PFR600 RAID controller for removal” on page 110. If this occurs, you can
use the following steps to enable the controller.
To enable a RAID controller:
1. In GVG Disk Utility, expand the tree view, then select the controller icon. (Peer
controllers that share the same set of disks are automatically selected as a pair.)
2. Check that the peer controller status is Offline.
3. Right-click the controller icon, then select Advanced | Enable A Controller or Enable
B Controller.
4. Click OK to continue.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
111
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
5. Check that the peer controller status is now Online.
The controller is now online as the backup controller.
Disabling a PFR600 disk module for removal
In the event that one of the PFR600 disk modules is operational, but begins to report
faults through various log files and status indicators, you can choose to disable the disk
module and remove it. Disabling the disk module and removing it in this way avoids
momentary interruptions in signal output that can occur if the disk fails. After replacing
the disabled disk module, you must start disk rebuild manually.
To disable a PFR600 disk module for removal:
1. Start GVG Disk Utility.
2. Expand the tree view to display bound disks.
3. Right-click the disk module icon, then select Advanced | Disable Drive.
NOTE: Disks modules may not be visible in the tree view if they are part of a newly
bound LUN. You must restart your RAID chassis and the Profile XP Media
Platform to allow the drive modules to be seen in GVG Disk Utility.
4. Click OK to continue.
The disk is disabled, and the disk access LED flashes blue.
5. Remove and replace the disk module.
Refer to procedures in the PFR600 Instruction Manual.
6. Wait approximately 1 minute for the disk to initialize.
The disk access LED is steady blue.
7. In GVG Disk Utility, right-click the LUN icon for the affected LUN, then select
Advanced | Start Rebuild.
8. To check rebuild status, do one of the following:
• Select the replacement disk icon in GVG Disk Utility, then view the disk status
in the right-hand pane. You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display.
On completion, the drive status changes from Rebuilding to Online.
• Open the Progress dialog box, by clicking View | Progress Report.
112
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Performing PFR700 maintenance tasks
Performing PFR700 maintenance tasks
PFR700 maintenance tasks include:
• “Downloading PFR700 disk drive firmware” on page 113
• “Replacing a failed disk module” on page 114
• “Disabling a PFR700 RAID controller for removal” on page 114
• “Disabling a PFR700 disk module for removal” on page 115
• “Configuring PFR700 network and SNMP settings” on page 116
Downloading PFR700 disk drive firmware
When upgrading your Profile XP System Software, you may be instructed in the
software release notes to upgrade the PFR700 disk drive firmware. This allows you to
take advantage of the disk drive enhancements and benefit from improved performance
and reliability.
To determine your disk drive type and current firmware version, select a disk drive icon
in the GVG Disk Utility tree view, then note the drive properties reported in the
right-hand pane. Use the following procedure if you need to download disk drive
firmware.
NOTE: The disk drives on each controller are upgraded one at a time which can
take as long as 2 minutes per drive. Also, the Disk Utility allows selecting multiple
controllers for disk firmware upgrades, however, upgrades are handled one
controller at a time. Take this into consideration when scheduling the upgrade.
To download disk drive firmware:
1. In the GVG Disk Utility, right-click a controller in the tree view, then select
Advanced | Download Firmware in the context menu.
NOTE: You can download firmware to a single disk by right-clicking a disk icon in
the tree view.
2. In the Open dialog box, locate the c:\profile\microcode directory, then select the
latest file for your disk drive type.
To determine drive type and current firmware version, select a drive in the tree
view, then note the drive properties reported in the right-hand pane.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
113
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
3. Click Open.
The Progress Report window appears showing the disk firmware download task
and the percentage completion.
4. Perform step 1 through step 3 to upgrade disk drives for the remaining controllers.
5. When finished, reboot the RAID storage and the Profile XP Media Platform. Refer
to “System reboot procedure” on page 94.
NOTE: If your PFR700 is part of an Open SAN, disregard the previous step, and
refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering-off and
powering-on the Open SAN.
This concludes the Loading Disk Firmware procedure.
Replacing a failed disk module
In the event of a disk drive failure, you’ll repair the system by replacing the disk module
as soon as possible. Refer to the PFR700 Instruction Manual for information on
removing and replacing disk modules.
NOTE: Always use GVG Disk Utility to physically identify the failed disk module.
Accidently removing the wrong disk module can destroy all media on the disk
drives. See “Identifying disk modules prior to removal” on page 3-98.
On inserting the replacement disk module, the RAID controller automatically starts
rebuilding the drive. You can verify rebuild status by looking at the disk access LED on
the front of the disk module, or by checking disk status in GVG Disk Utility.
To check disk status in GVG Disk Utility, select the disk module icon in the device tree.
Status is reported in the right-hand pane. On completion, the disk drive status changes
from Rebuilding to Online. You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display.
Disabling a PFR700 RAID controller for removal
This feature is provided for PFR700 RAID chassis that have redundant RAID controller
modules installed. In the event that one of the RAID controllers appears operational, but
also reports faults through various log files and status indicators, you can choose to
disable the controller and replace it. Disabling the controller and removing it in this way
avoids interruptions in signal output that can occur if the module fails or if it is simply
hot swapped while it is the active controller. When the replacement RAID controller
module is installed, it is automatically enabled and becomes the backup controller.
NOTE: Refer to the PFR700 Instruction Manual for procedures on removing and
replacing the RAID controller module.
To disable a controller:
1. Start the GVG Disk Utility.
2. Expand the tree view to display the controllers.
3. Right-click a controller icon in the tree view, then select Advanced | Disable A
Controller or Disable B Controller.
114
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Performing PFR700 maintenance tasks
4. Click OK to continue.
The RAID controller is disabled. You can check controller status in the Disk
Utility. You may need to refresh the display.
5. Remove and replace the disabled RAID controller module.
Refer to procedures in the PFR700 Instruction Manual.
6. On inserting the replacement RAID controller, it initializes and is automatically
enabled to become the “backup” RAID controller.
This concludes the Disabling a PFR700 RAID controller for removal procedure.
NOTE: If you accidentally disable the wrong controller, you can enable it again by
removing it and then replacing it in the chassis.
Disabling a PFR700 disk module for removal
In the event that one of the PFR700 disk modules is operational, but begins to report
faults through various log files and status indicators, you can choose to disable the disk
module and remove it. Disabling the disk module and removing it in this way avoids
momentary interruptions in signal output that can occur if the disk fails. The disabled
state is persistent and the disk remains disabled even if the RAID chassis is restarted.
After replacing the disabled disk module, the disk rebuild process starts automatically,
which also enables the disk module.
To disable a PFR700 disk module for removal:
1. Start GVG Disk Utility.
2. Expand the tree view to display bound disks.
3. Right-click the disk module icon, then select Advanced | Disable Drive.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
115
Chapter 3
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
NOTE: Disks modules may not be visible in the tree view if they are part of a newly
bound LUN. You must restart your RAID chassis and the Profile XP Media
Platform to allow the drive modules to be seen in GVG Disk Utility.
4. Click OK to continue.
The disk is disabled, and the disk fault LED is steady amber.
5. Remove and replace the disk module.
Refer to procedures in the PFR700 Instruction Manual.
6. Wait approximately 1 minute for the disk to initialize.
The disk ready LED is flashing.
7. To check rebuild status, do one of the following:
• Select the replacement disk icon in GVG Disk Utility, then view the disk status
in the right-hand pane. You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display.
On completion, the drive status changes from Rebuilding to Online.
• Open the Progress dialog box, by clicking View | Progress Report.
NOTE: If you accidentally disable the wrong disk module, you can enable it again
by removing it and then replacing it in the chassis.
Configuring PFR700 network and SNMP settings
Network and SNMP settings are set and stored on the LAN card. Therefore the PFR700
RAID chassis, including its one or two RAID controllers, is a single networked device.
This is different than other PFR series RAID devices in which each controller is a
networked device.
You can use the GVG Disk Utility to configure the following settings for the PFR700
RAID chassis:
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Gateway Address
• SNMP trap destinations
To configure these settings, do the following:
1. In the GVG Disk Utility, right-click the icon for a PFR700 controller and select Set
Network Properties. The Controller Network Settings dialog box opens.
116
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Resetting the PFC500 system clock
2. Enter network settings for the RAID chassis.
3. For each SNMP manager to which you want to send SNMP trap messages, enter
the IP address of the PC hosting the manager. If you are monitoring the PFR700/E
with NetCentral, enter the IP address of the NetCentral server (NetCentral 4.x and
higher) or NetCentral monitoring station (NetCentral 3.x and lower).
4. Click OK to save settings and close.
5. Restart the RAID chassis to put SNMP configuration changes into effect.
Resetting the PFC500 system clock
Use the following procedure to set the system clock on all PFC500 RAID Storage
chassis connected. This procedure sets the PFC500 RAID controller clock to the
Profile XP system clock (or the clock of the machine on which the Disk Utility is
running).
To reset the PFC500 clock:
1. In the GVG Disk Utility tree view, right-click the PFC500 node, then select
Reset Clock in the context menu.
2. On receiving an operation successful message, click OK.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
117
Chapter 3
118
Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
4
Adding or Removing Channels
Profile applications use channels to control disk recording and playback. A channel
defines a logical collection of Profile video, audio, and timecode resources and is
identified by a unique name. This chapter describes how you can remove channels you
no longer use and how to add and configure new channels for your specific needs. Once
you add and configure a new channel, it becomes available for use by Profile
applications.
Using the Channel Configuration dialog box
You use the Channel Configuration dialog box in Configuration Manager to remove, add
and configure channels. The Channel Configuration dialog box allows you to define
channel properties, including:
• Channel name
• Channel type
- DVCAM Player/Recorder
- DVCPRO 25 Player/Recorder
- DVCPRO 50 Player/Recorder
- MPEG D10 Player/Recorder
- MPEG Player
- MPEG Recorder
- MPEG Player/Recorder
- MPEG Player/Recorder (Dec + Enc)
- HD/SD MPEG Player
- HD MPEG Player
- HD MPEG Recorder
- HD MPEG Player/Recorder
• Video inputs and outputs
• Aspect ratio conversion for up- and down-conversion
• Audio inputs and outputs
• Timecode sources (inputs and outputs)
The Channel Configuration dialog box also allows you to enable Browse Video for a
video track. Browse video is MPEG-1 proxy video that is recorded along with the track.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
119
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
Displaying the Channel Configuration dialog box
To display the Channel Configuration dialog box:
In the Configuration Manager window, choose Channel Configuration. The Channel
Configuration dialog box appears.
120
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Working with channels
Working with channels
Listed here are a few things to consider when working with channels and the Channel
Configuration dialog box.
• Clicking the Finish button saves the changes you’ve made to the channels and
closes the Configuration Manager dialog box.
• If you make changes to a channel while it is in use by an application, you must
reacquire the channel in the application, otherwise you won’t see the change
until the next time the application is started.
• When the Channel Configuration dialog box is opened, it allocates all available
outputs so the effect of crosspoint changes may be seen as you make them.
• Adding and configuring channels is not dependent on the number or availability
of video, audio, and timecode resources since you are only defining a channel.
Resources are allocated when a channel is selected by a Profile application. Only
one instance of a channel can be used at a time.
• Configuration Manager limits the number of channels you can define to sixteen.
If you need to define more than sixteen channels, consider saving channel
configurations and then defining new ones. Refer to “Saving and restoring your
system settings” on page 57.
Default settings for channels you add
When you add a channel, the new channel is created with settings derived from the
current channel. The current channel is the channel tab selected in the Channel
Configuration dialog box. Channel settings that are copied include channel type, number
of video, audio, uncompressed VBI lines, and timecode tracks, video quality, still play
mode, and audio window size. After adding a channel, all you have to do is specify
video, audio, and timecode inputs and outputs.
When a channel is added, it is given a default name. You may change the name by
entering it in the name text box in the channel tab. Channel names can have up to 32
characters.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
121
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
Why resources appear dimmed, red, or in use
The channel configuration dialog box uses colored text to display resource names to help
prevent you from creating resource conflicts that could occur if you try to use channels
at the same time.
When a resource, such as a video output, is not assigned to any channel, the check box
next to its name is cleared and its name is in black print. If the resource is selected on
another channel tab, its check box and name are dimmed.
Dimmed text
Indicates the resource is
selected on another
channel tab.
If you select a resource that’s already selected on another channel tab, its text changes
from dimmed to red. Selecting a resource assigned to another channel is not necessarily
a problem. You can have several channels that use the same resources. However,
channels assigned the same resource will display a Warning symbol on their channel tabs
because the channels cannot be used at the same time. (See “Using the Warning symbol
to find shared resources” on page 4-124.)
Red text
Indicates the resource is
selected on more than one
channel tab.
The words “in use” appear next to a resource name when an application is currently
using the resource. Resources that are in use are not effected by your crosspoint
selections in the Channel Configuration dialog box.
(in use)
Indicates the resource is in
use by an application.
You can use Tool Tips to find out which application is using the resource that is marked
“in use”. See “Using Tool Tips to manage resources” on page 123.
NOTE: You can select a resource marked “in use”, but you won’t see the crosspoint
change because the resource is in use by an application.
122
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Using Tool Tips to manage resources
Using Tool Tips to manage resources
The Channel Configuration dialog box uses Tool Tips to provide additional information
about how a resource is used. When you hold the cursor for a short period of time over
a resource displayed as gray, red, or “in use”, a Tool Tip will appear showing status of
the resource.
• If the resource is assigned to another channel (dimmed or red) the Tool Tip
displays the channel name.
• If the current channel has selected a resource that is in use, the Tool Tip displays
the name of the application using the resource and the name of the machine
running the application.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
123
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
Using the Warning symbol to find shared resources
The Warning symbol appears on channel tabs that share the same resource. This feature
helps you identify resource conflicts which will occur if you try to use both channels at
the same time.
To determine which resource is assigned to more than one channel:
1. Click on one of the channel tabs displaying the Warning symbol.
2. Select the Track in the configuration tree displaying the Warning symbol, then
click the Crosspoints button.
3. The resource assigned to more than one channel is displayed in “red” text.
124
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Using the Summary button to review channel settings
Using the Summary button to review channel settings
Choosing the Summary button opens the channel summary dialog box which provides a
list of channels and the resources assigned to them. The Summary dialog box allows you
to review all channels and their settings as you scroll through the channel summary list.
When the dialog box opens, the display automatically scrolls to show the properties of
the channel tab you have selected.
A similar summary dialog box appears in Profile applications to help you when you are
selecting channels.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
125
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
Adding and configuring a new channel
Adding a channel involves naming the channel, choosing the channel type and number
of video, audio, and timecode tracks, along with the crosspoints for each track.
To add a channel
Use the Add Channel button in the Channel Configuration dialog box to add a new
channel. When you click the Add Channel button, a new channel is created with the same
properties as the current channel tab selected.
1. Click the channel tab most similar to the channel you want to configure in the
Channel Configuration dialog box
2. Click the Add Channel button.
Entering channel name and description
You can enter the name to identify the new channel. You can also enter text into the
channel description window. The channel description is displayed along with the
channel name in Profile applications and can help operators select channels. For
example, a channel description could be “Weekend news setup” or “Use for play channel
in TimeDelay”.
To enter channel name and description:
1. Enter a channel name in the Name text box.
2. Click the channel icon (
Description text box.
126
Profile XP System Guide
) in the configuration tree to display the Channel
13 May 2005
Entering channel name and description
Name text box
Description box
3. Enter a channel description in the Description text box. The channel description is
displayed with other channel properties when the Summary button is selected. See
“Using the Summary button to review channel settings” on page 125. Profile
applications can also show the channel descriptions to help you select the
appropriate channel.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
127
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
Selecting the channel type
You can use the Type drop-down list to change the channel type. Channel types are
described in the following table.
Channel Type
Resource Used
Description
DVCAM Player/
Recorder
Video codec configured as
DVCAM
Can record and play clips, but not at the same
time. Codec type must be set to DVCPRO 25.
DVCPRO 25 Player/
Recorder
Video codec configured as
DVCPRO 25
Can record and play clips, but not at the same
time.
DVCPRO 50 Player/
Recorder
Video codec configured as
DVCPRO 50
Can record and play clips, but not at the same
time.
MPEG D10 Player/
Recorder
Video codec configured to
record MPEG D10 format
Can record clips using MPEG D10 format.
Recorded clips can be loaded and played using
any MPEG Player or Player/Recorder channel.
MPEG Recorder
Encoder only or Video
codec configured as MPEG
Encoder
Can only record clips. Recorded clips must be
loaded and played using an MPEG Player or
Player/Recorder Channel.
MPEG Player
Decoder only or Video
codec configured as MPEG
Decoder
Can only play clips.
MPEG Player/Recorder
Decoder and Encoder
(PVS1000) or one video
codec (PVS1100).
Can record and play clips, but not at the same
time.
MPEG Player/Recorder
(Dec + Enc)
Decoder and Encoder
(PVS1100).
Can record and play clips, but not at the same
time. Uses two codec resources.
HD/SD MPEG Player
HD Decoder only
Can only play MPEG 4:2:0 clips. Clips may be
HD or SD, and are up- or down-converted
appropriately for the assigned output. Requires
Agile Output option.
HD MPEG Recorder
HD Encoder only
Can only record clips. Recorded clips must be
loaded and played using a Player or Player/
Recorder Channel.
HD MPEG Player
HD Decoder only
Can only play clips.
HD MPEG
Player/Recorder
HD Decoder and HD
Encoder
Can record and play clips, but not at the same
time.
The channel types that appear in the drop-down list depend on the hardware capabilities
of the media platform. DVCAM, DVCPRO 25 and 50 channels only appear when Video
Processor boards are present. HD/SD and HD MPEG channel types appear only when
high definition encoders, decoders, and I/O boards are present.
The channel types you choose will affect how many channels you can operate at the
same time. On Profile XP systems with separate MPEG encoders and decoders, an
MPEG Player/Recorder channel consumes both an encoder and decoder, but uses only
one at a time. Defining channels that can only play or only record uses resources more
128
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting the channel type
efficiently, but does not allow you to play and record using a single channel. Enabling
browse video consumes a standard definition encoder, preventing it from being used
with broadcast quality video.
To change the channel type:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window. The Channel
Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Select the tab for the channel you want to modify.
3. Select an appropriate channel type. Depending on the channel type, different codec
or encoder/decoder information is displayed below the configuration tree.
Video quality and crosspoints remain the same after changing channel type.
NOTE: The Browse Video option is available only in media platforms equipped
with standard definition MPEG encoders or video codecs configured as MPEG
encoders. Browse video is not available with high definition MPEG encoders.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
129
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
Selecting video quality and crosspoints
You’ll need to select which video inputs and outputs you want a channel to use as well
as the video quality for channels that can record.
The Channel Configuration dialog box allocates all available outputs so that you can
monitor your crosspoint selections. The black video input, available only as an SD input,
can be used to verify video output routing.
To select input and output resources for each video track:
1. Double-click the video icon (
) to expand the configuration tree.
2. Choose a video track in the configuration tree, such as Track 1.
3. Click the Crosspoints button, then select a video input from the Video Input check
boxes. You can choose only one video input for a video track.
4. With the video Crosspoints button still selected, choose a video output from the
Video Output(s) list. You can choose one or more video outputs for a video track.
Each output corresponds to one of the video output connectors on the back of the
Profile XP system.
NOTE: You can temporarily select the internal colorbars (only with SD) to verify
crosspoint routing. Play channels in E to E mode will display colorbars if selected.
130
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting video quality and crosspoints
NOTE: Quality selections are not applicable to DVCPRO channels.
5. Select the video data rate using the Video Quality drop-down list. Video quality
settings for each data rate are shown in the table.
Standard Definition
Quality Settings
Data Rate
Chrominance
Sampling
GoP
Draft
4 Mbps
4:2:0
Low
8 Mbps
IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP (PVS1000)
IBPBPBPBPBPB (PVS1100)
Medium (default)
15Mbps
High
24Mbps
High Definition
Quality Settings
Data Rate
GoP
Low
30 Mb/s
IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP (default)
Medium (default)
55 Mb/s
High
80 Mb/s
4:2:2
You can customize video quality settings using the Custom Video Quality Settings
dialog box. Refer to “Defining and selecting a custom video quality preset” on page
162.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
131
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
6. Click the Browse Video check box if you want to add MPEG-1 proxy video to the
track.
NOTE: The Browse Video option is available only in media platforms equipped
with standard definition MPEG encoder boards. Browse video is not available with
video codecs configured as MPEG encoders or with high definition MPEG
encoders.
132
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting video quality and crosspoints
7. Click Browse Video. Select an encoder for the browse video. The size of the
MPEG-1 video image when played back is 352 x 240 for NTSC, and 352 x 288 for
PAL.
NOTE: The MPEG encoder that you select for use with browse video is dedicated
to that use and is no longer available for encoding broadcast quality video.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
133
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
8. Select the browse video data rate using the Browse Video Quality drop-down list.
Browse video quality settings for each data rate are shown in the table.
Browse Video
Quality Settings
Data Rate
GoP
Draft
.5 Mbps
IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP (default)
Low
.8 Mbps
Medium
1.2Mbps
VHS Quality
(default)
1.5Mbps
You can customize video quality settings using the Custom Video Quality Settings
dialog box. Refer to “Defining and selecting a custom video quality preset” on page
162.
134
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Setting the SD MPEG recorder aspect ratio
Setting the SD MPEG recorder aspect ratio
When you record standard definition material with an MPEG recorder, you can specify
the aspect ratio to be used when that material is played out on an HD output. If you select
an aspect ratio of 16:9, this setting overrides the default up-conversion aspect ratio
setting for the playout channel.
The aspect ratio attribute is saved as part of the MPEG video media file. If the clip is
transferred to another machine or used as part of a complex movie, the attribute remains
in effect.
Once the clip has been recorded, you can use Media Manager to change the clip’s aspect
ratio when it is up-converted for playout on an HD output.
This attribute applies to all clips recorded on a channel with this setting.
To set the aspect ratio when recording SD MPEG material:
1. Double-click the video icon (
) to expand the configuration tree.
2. Choose a video track in the configuration tree, such as Track 1.
3. Click the Aspect Ratio button to see the aspect ratio choices.
4. Select the desired aspect ratio, then click Finish.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
135
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
Selecting playout aspect ratio conversion
An HD/SD MPEG Player channel allows you to play SD and HD MPEG 4:2:0 clips
through the same output, either HD SDI or SD SDI.
If you select an HD output, all SD material is up-converted to HD. When this takes place,
you can specify how the aspect ratio of your material is modified for the 16:9 HD
display.
Similarly, if you use an SD output, all HD material is down-converted to SD. The aspect
ratio of your HD material is adjusted for the SD display.
NOTE: If you define two HD/SD MPEG Player channels using HD decoders on the
same board, both must use the same output type, either standard definition SDI or
high definition HD-SDI. If you want to use different output types for HD/SD
MPEG Player channels, you must use HD decoders on different boards.
Once you have selected the output to be used with your HD/SD MPEG Player, you can
select the default up- or down-conversion for clips played on that channel. You can
override this setting by modifying the clip’s properties using Media Manager.
136
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting playout aspect ratio conversion
Setting up-conversion aspect ratio
To select set the aspect ratio conversion for SD material on an HD/SD MPEG Player
channel on an HD output:
1. Double-click the video icon (
) to expand the configuration tree.
2. Choose a video track in the configuration tree, such as Track 1.
3. Click the Up Conversion button to see the aspect ratio choices.
4. Select the desired aspect ratio conversion from the available options
- Pillarbox - The 4:3 aspect ratio is maintained, centered on the screen, with black
bars filling the left and right portions of the 16:9 display.
- Half Pillarbox - The picture aspect ratio is maintained, but the image is slightly
enlarged. The top and bottom of the image are slightly cropped, and thin black
bars fill the left and right portions of the 16:9 display.
- Zoom - The picture aspect ratio is maintained, but the image is enlarged so that
it horizontally fills the HD display. The top and bottom of the 4:3 SD image are
cropped to fit in the 16:9 display.
- Stretch to Fit - The picture aspect ratio is distorted. The image fills the screen
vertically without cropping, and is stretched horizontally to fill the 16:9 display.
This conversion up-converts Full Height Anamorphic (FHA) 16:9SD material.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
137
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
Setting down-conversion aspect ratio
To select set the aspect ratio conversion for HD material on an HD/SD MPEG Player
channel on an SD output:
1. Double-click the video icon (
) to expand the configuration tree.
2. Choose a video track in the configuration tree, such as Track 1.
3. Click the Down Conversion button to see the aspect ratio choices
4. Select the desired aspect ratio conversion from the available options
- Letterbox - The 16:9 aspect ratio is maintained, centered on the screen, with
black bars filling the top and bottom portions of the 4:3 display.
- Half Letterbox - The picture aspect ratio is maintained, but the image is slightly
enlarged. The left and right sides the image are slightly cropped, and thin black
bars fill the top and bottom portions of the 4:3 display.
- Crop - The picture aspect ratio is maintained, but the image is enlarged so that
it vertically fills the SD display. The left and right sides of the 16:9 HD image
are cropped to fit in the 4:3 SD display.
- Compress - The picture aspect ratio is distorted. The image fills the screen
horizontally without cropping, and is stretched vertically to fill the 4:3 display.
This conversion generates Full Height Anamorphic (FHA) 16:9 SD material.
138
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting audio channels for each audio track
Selecting audio channels for each audio track
To select audio channels for each audio track:
1. Double click the Audio icon (
) to expand the configuration tree.
2. Select the audio Track icon in the configuration tree.
3. For each pair of audio tracks, select an audio channel pair by placing a check in the
appropriate check box. You can change the audio format for the audio channels
using Configuration Manager (refer to “Changing the audio I/O format” on page
197).
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
139
Chapter 4
Adding or Removing Channels
Selecting timecode I/O for each timecode track
To select timecode inputs and outputs for each timecode track:
1. Double-click the Timecode icon (
) to expand the configuration tree.
2. Click the Crosspoints button and then select a timecode input from the Timecode
Input list. If you choose TC Generator, refer to “Using the internal timecode
generators” on page 212 for instructions on setting up the timecode generator.
3. With the Crosspoints button still selected, choose a timecode output from the
Timecode Output(s) list.
NOTE: The VITC output listed corresponds to the video output assigned to the
channel. For example, “SDI-VITC-OutA-J5” appears in the Timecode Output list
box for Vtr1 when “SDI-OutA-J5” is selected as the video output. If you change a
video output for a channel, the VITC output listed also changes.
4. Click the Finish to save your channel settings and close the Channel Configuration
dialog box. You can now select the new channel in your Profile application.
140
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Removing a channel
Removing a channel
You can remove a channel that is no longer needed. Once a channel is removed, it cannot
be recalled again. You will have to create it again by using the Add Channel button.
To remove a channel:
1. Click the tab of the channel to be removed.
2. Click the Remove Channel button in the Channel Configuration dialog box.
3. Click Finish to save the change and close the dialog box.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
141
Chapter 4
142
Adding or Removing Channels
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
You can use Configuration Manager to customize channel video settings to satisfy the
needs of your video system.
Using Configuration Manager you can:
• Adjust video output timing for any channel.
• Change the video standard for the system.
• Specify the compression type for each video codec
• Change the video input/outputs used by a channel.
• Change the compression settings for a channel.
• Select the video still-play mode
• View the status of the video input signal for a channel.
• Set up timecode burn-in and text overlay on the optional video monitor board.
Adjusting video output timing
Two output timing modes are provided for timing the Profile XP Media Platform into
your system: Zero Timed mode and E to E Timed mode. In Zero Timed mode, the
playout timing of all video outputs are set to match zero time of the system reference. In
E to E Timed mode, playout timing is set to match the 16 line E to E signal delay through
the system.
The timing mode you choose depends on how you use the Profile XP system. When
using the Profile XP system as a playout source, you will, most likely use Zero Timed
output mode so that video output timing will be zero timed. If you are using the
Profile XP system to switch between playout and video input signals, you must use
E to E Timed mode so that playout timing matches E to E timing through the system.
This ensures clean switching between the video input and decoder output.
With the Profile XP system timing controls, you can make additional playout timing
adjustments in both video output timing modes to meet downstream system
requirements.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
143
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Adjusting playout timing to match zero time
In Zero Timed Output mode, all playout timing is set to match the system reference
timing. You can use the Video Output Timing Offset adjustment, provided for each
video output, to meet downstream timing requirements.
To adjust playout timing offset to match zero time:
1. Choose Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Timing
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 4 of 5, Reference Timing Offset.
3. Select Zero-Timed mode, then click Finish. Playout timing is now set to match
internal reference.
NOTE: When you change the playout timing mode, restart all Profile applications
currently using the system.
4. Some playout timing adjustment may be required to satisfy downstream timing
requirements in your system. If so, adjust playout timing as follows:
a. Select Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Timing
dialog box appears.
b. Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 3 of 5.
NOTE: The video output timing page can show HD outputs, SD outputs, or both
depending on the system reference and video standard selected.
144
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Adjusting playout timing to match zero time
Delay
Advance
c. Select a video output from the Video Output Timing list or click Select All to
adjust all outputs at the same time.
d. Use the Output Timing Offset controls to adjust playout timing to meet your
timing requirements.
e. Repeat step c and step d for the remaining video outputs, if required, then select
Finish.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
145
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Adjusting playout timing to match E to E timing
In E to E Timed Output mode, all playout timing is delayed from the system reference
by +16 lines to match the E to E delay through the system. This ensures clean switching
between video inputs and decoders outputs. You can use the Output Timing Offset
adjustment, provided for each video output, to meet downstream timing requirements.
To adjust playout timing to match E to E timing:
1. Choose Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Output
Timing dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 4 of 5, Reference Timing Offset.
3. Select E to E output timing mode, then click Finish. Playout timing is now set to
match E to E timing.
NOTE: If you changed the playout timing mode, restart all Profile applications
currently using the system.
4. Some playout timing adjustment may be required to satisfy downstream timing
requirements in your system. If so, adjust playout timing as follows:
a. Select Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Timing
dialog box appears.
b. Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 3 of 5.
146
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Adjusting playout timing to match E to E timing
Delay
Advance
c. Select a video output from the Video Output Timing list or click Select All to
adjust all outputs at the same time.
d. Use the Output Timing Offset controls to adjust playout timing to meet your
timing requirements.
e. Repeat step c and step d for the remaining video outputs, if required, then select
Finish.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
147
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Adjusting system reference timing to offset all playout timing
Adjusting system reference timing offsets all playout timing relative to the reference.
The reference timing should only be changed if the downstream timing requirements
cannot be met by adjusting the video output timing.
To adjust system timing relative to system reference:
1. Choose Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Timing
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 4 of 5, Reference Timing Offset. The
controls that appear on this page and their labeling depend on the video standard
and timing reference you’ve chosen.
Notice that the progressive HD video standard (720p) does not have a field
adjustment, just line and pixel offsets, while the interlaced video standards
(standard definition and 1080i) do have a field adjustment.
3. Adjust system timing using the System Reference Timing Offset controls, then
click Finish.
148
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Adjusting system reference timing to offset all playout timing
Delay
Advance
Delay
Advance
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
149
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Recording synchronous and asynchronous feeds
The Profile XP Media Platform is a synchronous device. All the outputs are locked to
the house reference and all the inputs must be genlocked to that reference and at zero
time. The Profile XP Media Platform inputs can handle the anomalous asynchronous
case without interruption; video and audio are resampled to the house clock and
maintain phase within a window of one video frame. This resampling is not intended
to take the place of a frame synchronizer. It provides some protection if an untimed
signal is routed to an input, although loss of sync events may result in lip-sync errors.
NOTE: If you are using the Profile XP Media Platform to switch between video
inputs and decoder outputs (playback), you must set the output timing mode to E to
E Timed Outputs. For more information see “Adjusting video output timing” on
page 143.
150
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Changing the system video standard
Changing the system video standard
Changing the system video standard resets the Profile XP system hardware for operation
with one of the following line standards:
• 525/60 - Standard definition NTSC
• 625/50 - Standard definition PAL
• 1080i - High definition interlaced
• 720p - High definition progressive
To change the system video standard:
1. Choose Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window. Page 1 of the Video
Timing dialog box, System Reference, appears.
2. Select the reference signal that will be used with your system on the Genlock input
and click Next to go to the next page.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
151
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
3. Select the video standard that you wish to use for your HD channels. If you have
installed an Agile Output license, this is the format to which your SD material will
be up-converted when you play it on an HD output through an HD decoder.
NOTE: The choice of system references determines which video standards are
available for selection on the Video Standard page.
NOTE: After changing the system reference or video standard, you must restart all
Profile control applications currently using the system resources.
4. Click Finish to save your settings.
152
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Configuring the video codec type
Configuring the video codec type
On the Profile XP media platforms equipped with one or more Video Processor boards,
you can configure each of the codecs to be one of five types. The type principally applies
to the video compression used when recording. Any of these codecs can play all standard
definition clips of any of these supported format seamlessly, back to back, without any
configuration changes.
• DVCPRO 25 Codec — This type uses the DVCPRO compression format at
25Mbps. To configure a channel as DVCPRO 25, you must have at least one codec
configured as this type.
• DVCPRO 50 Codec — This type uses the DVCPRO compression format at
50Mbps. This codec type is available as a selection only if you have the license for
50Mbps operation. To configure a channel as DVCPRO 50, you must have at least
one codec configured as this type.
• MPEG Encoder — This type configures the codec to be an MPEG encoder for use
with MPEG recorder and MPEG D10 recorder channel types. It is important to
remember that these encoders have different capabilities than the encoders on the
Profile XP MPEG Encoder board. Video is encoded only at bit rates up to 25Mbps
or with the license, up to 50Mbps.
• MPEG Decoder — This type configures the codec to be an MPEG decoder for use
in playing out standard definition MPEG video.
• MPEG Codec — This type configures the codec to be an MPEG codec, able to
switch from Play to Record without using a second codec resource. The MPEG
codec supports video at bit rates up to 25Mbps, or with the license, up to 50Mbps,
including MPEG D10. Choose this configuration for use with MPEG Player/
Recorder or MPEG D10 Player/Recorder channels
NOTE: When you select or change a video codec type, you must restart the media
platform for the change to take effect.
To configure a video codec:
1. Choose Video Codec in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Codec
dialog box appears. The DVCPRO 50 codec type will not appear if you do not have
the 50Mbps license.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
153
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
2. Select one or more codecs from the list, and click one of the Video Codec Type
options.
3. Click Finish to save your settings.
4. Restart the media platform to put the codec type selection into effect.
154
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting the video I/Os used by a channel
Selecting the video I/Os used by a channel
You can use the Channel Configuration dialog box to change the video input and outputs
used by a channel.
To change video input and output used by a channel:
1. Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window. The
Channel Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to modify.
3. Click the Video icon (
), then click the video track you want to modify.
4. Click the Crosspoints button, then select the video input and video outputs you
want to use.
For information on why resources appear dimmed, red, or “in use”, refer to “Why
resources appear dimmed, red, or in use” on page 122.
5. Click Finish to save your changes and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
NOTE: If the channel is currently in use by an application, it must be reselected
within the application before your changes will take effect. Refer to the user manual
for the Profile application you are using.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
155
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Selecting video quality for a channel
NOTE: Quality selections are not applicable to DVCPRO channels.
You can manage storage capacity and video quality by adjusting the channel MPEG-2
compression settings. If you have enabled browse video for the channel, you can adjust
the MPEG-1 settings in a similar manner. Using the Video Quality and Browse Video
Quality drop-down lists, you can change compression settings by selecting one of the
video quality presets provided (shown in the table), or you can define and select a custom
preset. Selecting a preset determines the data rate, chrominance sampling method and
group of pictures (GoP) structure used during recording.
Quality Preset
MPEG-1 Data
rate in Mbps
(Browse Video)
MPEG-2 Data
rate in Mbps
(Standard Def)
MPEG-2 Data
rate in Mbps
(High Def)
Draft
.4
4
Low
.8
8
30
Medium (default)
1.2
15
50
High (VHS
Quality, default
for browse video)
1.5
24
80
Custom 1 to 4
.3-1.5 in
increments of .1
4-50 in
increments of 4
(12 default)
Chrominance
Sampling
Method
Group of Pictures (GoP)*
4:2:0†
IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP
(PVS1000)
IBPBPBPBPBPB (PVS1100,
PVS3000, PVS3500)
4:2:2 (4:2:0
only in HD
and browse
video)
4:2:2 (default)
or 4:2:0
(default for
browse video)
Choose from I, IP, IBP, IBBP,
IBPBP, IBBPBBP,
IBPBPBPBP, IBBPBBPBBP,
IBBPBBPBBPBBP, and
IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP
(PVS1000) or,
I, IP, IBPB, IBPBPB,
IBPBPBPB, IBPBPBPBPB,
and IBPBPBPBPBPB
(PVS1100, PVS3000,
PVS3500)
*
Profile XP applications can play but not record clips using open GoP. However, third party applications can be written for the
Profile XP system that do both.
†
Video recorded at 4:2:0 on the Video Processor board (PVS1100, PVS3000, and PVS3500) begins at line 23, and so does not
include VBI information such as VITC in the compressed video.
You can select MPEG D10 bitrates of 30, 40, or 50 Mb/s from the Video Quality
drop-down list.
Guidelines for selecting Video Quality Presets
With the Profile XP Media Platform, you can improve picture quality for your available
storage capacity by selecting chrominance sampling method and GoP length for a given
video data rate.
The type of video and how it will be used largely determines the compression settings
you should select. It is important to understand the type of material you will be
broadcasting and select the appropriate compression settings.
Use the following guidelines when choosing one of the video quality presets or defining
and selecting a custom preset. For more information on the relationship between picture
quality and the type of video, data rate, chrominance sampling method, and GoP look for
156
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Guidelines for selecting Video Quality Presets
the white paper, An Analysis of MPEG Encoding Techniques on Picture Quality on the
Grass Valley Web site. You can also refer to commercially available books on video
compression.
Guidelines for selecting video quality presets:
• Data Rate - Selecting the data rate tells the encoder how much data or how many
bits to use to compress the picture. Generally set as high as possible to obtain the
storage capacity needed. Also consider the following:
- Sports footage (video containing lots of motion) requires significantly higher
video data rates than an interview show.
- Clips with lots of chrominance, typical of many commercials, require higher
data rates to maintain quality.
- Higher data rates should be used for any production work that requires multiple
generations or when the material is subject to external up-conversion to HD.
NOTE: Information about Profile XP system storage capacities for different video
data rates is located in “Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility” on
page 65.
• Chrominance Sampling Method - Options include 4:2:2 and 4:2:0. Consider the
following guidelines:
- Select 4:2:2 encoding whenever storage capacity allows it, especially when you
know the video is being used in a production environment where it will
experience multiple generations.
- You must use 4:2:0 sampling for standard-definition video that will be
up-converted using the Definition Independent HD decoder. 4:2:0 sampling can
also be used for slightly better picture quality below 10 Mb/s since the reduction
in chrominance information allows more detail in the luminance information.
However, reducing chrominance information by half does impact picture quality
in a video sequence with large chrominance variance.
• GoP Length - Determines the number and structure of I, P, and B frames. Since B
frames contain 25% of the information of an I frame and a P frame contains about
50%, significant storage efficiencies can be realized with long GoP structures. In
general then, lengthening the GoP structure allows operation at lower data rates for
equivalent picture quality. Consider the following guidelines:
- Choose the longest GoP structure possible as the storage benefits outweigh the
picture quality improvements.
- Use I frame only and short GoP structures for editing applications which need
flexibility in performing insert edits.
- Use I frame only for off speed play.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
157
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Selecting video quality settings for a channel
To select channel video quality:
1. Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manual window. The Channel
Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Select the tab for the channel you want to modify, then use the Video Quality
drop-down list to select the video quality preset you want to use.
3. To view the properties for the video quality preset you select, click the Video
Quality settings button ( ) next to the Video Quality drop-down list.
158
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting video quality settings for a channel
4. If you are configuring an MPEG D10 Recorder or Player/Recorder channel, you
should select the desired D10 bitrate (30, 40, or 50 Mb/s) from the Video Quality
drop-down list.
5. Click Finish to save your changes and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
NOTE: If the channel is currently in use by an application, it must be reselected
within the application before your changes will take effect. Refer to the User
Manual for the Profile application you are using.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
159
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Selecting browse video quality settings for a channel
When browse video is enabled, you can make settings for the MPEG-1 video quality in
much the same way as you do for the MPEG-2 video.
To select channel video quality:
1. Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manual window. The Channel
Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Select the tab for the channel you want to modify, then click the Browse Video
button.
3. Use the Browse Video Quality drop-down list to select a browse video quality
preset.
4. To view the properties for the video quality preset you select, click the Video
Quality settings button ( ) next to the Browse Video Quality drop-down list.
160
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting browse video quality settings for a channel
5. Click Finish to save your changes and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
161
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Defining and selecting a custom video quality preset
You can modify the custom presets provided in both the Video Quality and Browse
Video Quality drop-down lists. Using custom settings, you can more closely manage
signal quality and record capacity by choosing the chrominance sampling method, group
of picture length (GoP), and bit rate best suited for your application.
To modify the settings for a custom video quality preset:
1. Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window. The
Channel Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to modify. If you want to modify a browse
video setting, click the Browse Video button.
3. Select one of the custom presets in the Video Quality drop-down list.
4. Click the Video Quality Settings button ( ). The MPEG Video Quality Settings
dialog box (on the left) or the MPEG-1 Browse Video Quality Settings dialog box
(on the right) appears.
5. Click and drag the diamond on the grid to change the bit rate and group of pictures
(GoP) settings, and click the button for the desired chrominance sampling (note
that you cannot change the chrominance setting for browse video).
The settings used for the High, Medium, Low, and Draft presets can be used as
reference points when you are making a custom setting.
You can change the preset name while in the dialog box.
6. Click OK when you are finished.
7. Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
NOTE: If the channel is currently in use by an application, it must be reacquired
within the application before your changes will take effect. Refer to the User
Manual for the Profile application you are using.
162
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Recording VBI information uncompressed
Recording VBI information uncompressed
NOTE: VBI information is not present in HD video. Instead, this information is
carried in the video stream as ancillary data.
For DVCPRO 25, Closed Captioning and V-chip data is extracted and stored on
input, inserted on output.
For DVCPRO 50, Closed Captioning and V-chip data is compressed.
The Profile XP Media Platform provides the ability to store up to 6 lines of
uncompressed Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) information along with your MPEG
clips. This feature is desirable for uses such as closed captioning, which might be
seriously degraded by losses incurred at lower video compression data rates. However,
storing VBI information in uncompressed form can add up to 3Mb/s to your storage
requirements.
Specifying lines of VBI information to store uncompressed involves using the Channel
Configuration dialog box to select which lines the channel will treat as uncompressed
data.
To select which VBI lines to record as uncompressed data:
1. Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager dialog box. The
Channel Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to modify, then the Video Track icon ( )
in the configuration tree.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
163
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
3. Click VBI Encoding. By default, Compress VBI is selected, and no VBI information
is recorded in uncompressed form.
4. To store VBI information in uncompressed form, clear the Compress VBI
checkbox. A list of lines that will not be compressed is displayed. By default, no
lines are listed.
164
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Recording VBI information uncompressed
5. To add lines to the uncompressed lines list:
a. Click Add. The Add VBI line dialog box appears.
b. Select a line number using the Line drop-down list.
c. Select whether to preserve Luma or Chroma. Preserving luma and chroma
requires two lines of data.
d. Click OK to add the line to the list of uncompressed lines.
e. Repeat step a through step d to add other lines to the uncompressed lines list.
You can add up to six lines.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
165
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
6. To remove lines, select a line number, then click Remove.
7. Click Finish to save your changes.
NOTE: If the channel is currently in use by an application, it must be reacquired
within the application before your changes will take effect. Refer to the chapter in
the Profile XP User Manual for the Profile application you are using.
166
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting the video still-play mode
Selecting the video still-play mode
The Profile XP Media Platform has two still-play modes for displaying video during
freeze frame: Line Double and Interlaced. Line-Double is the default setting and uses the
content of one field for both fields during still-play for a one field freeze. Interlaced
mode displays two fields in still play mode for a two field freeze. With Interlaced, you
may see some motion jitter in still-play. Line-Double eliminates motion jitter.
NOTE: This setting has no effect when using a progressive video standard.
To select still-play mode:
1. Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager dialog box. The
Channel Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to modify.
3. Select the Video icon ( ) in the configuration tree. The still-play mode controls
appear at the bottom of the Channel Configuration dialog box.
4. Select the still play mode you want to use.
5. Choose Finish to save your change and to close the Channel Configuration dialog
box.
NOTE: If the channel is currently in use by an application, it must be reacquired
within the application before your changes will take effect. Refer to the User
Manual for the Profile application you are using.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
167
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Viewing video input status
You can use Configuration Manager to check the status of the video input signal.
To check video input status:
1. Choose Video Input in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Input
dialog box appears.
2. Select a video input from the Video Input list. The following table gives a
description of the video input status indicators:
Status Indicators
Description
Embedded Audio Status
Indicates which embedded audio groups
are present on the video input.
Video input status
Indicates the status of the video input
signal.
VITC timecode status
Indicates the status of VITC timecode on
the video input. May require setting up the
VITC reader on page 2 of the Video Input
dialog box.
Ancillary data status:
Indicates the status of the data extracted
from the ancillary data space.
VITC and LTC
168
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Modifying video input settings
Modifying video input settings
You can modify the video input settings.
• You can select whether the input freezes or displays black when the video input
signal is lost.
• You can select which lines of the vertical blanking interval will be recorded
uncompressed.
• You can set up the VITC reader.
Setting up the VITC reader
NOTE: The VITC Setup page is only available when the system reference is
Reference Black, and the system has one or more SD input boards. Even when
present in the system, HD inputs do not appear on this page to prevent confusion.
All video inputs include VITC readers. A reader has two VITC detection modes:
Automatic and Manual. When you select automatic detection, you can set the range of
vertical interval lines scanned to find the VITC signal pair; lines 10 to 21 by default.
Manual allows you to choose specific line numbers to detect the VITC signals.
Automatic detection is the default setting. In manual VITC detection, you can specify
the lines used to read VITC. Use manual detection when two sets of VITC are embedded
in the video signal.
To set up the VITC reader:
1. Choose Video Input in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Input
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Input page 2 of 3.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
169
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
3. Select a video input from the list or click Select All to configure all video inputs at
the same time.
4. Select one of the VITC timecode options as follows:
- Auto Detection - Select the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box, then
enter the range of lines you want the system to search for VITC using the sliders.
- Manual Detection - Clear the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box,
then type or select the line numbers where the VITC pair can be found.
5. Click Finish to saving your settings.
170
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Erasing video input VBI information
Erasing video input VBI information
NOTE: This information applies only to standard definition MPEG video.
You can remove unwanted VBI information that may be present on video inputs so that
the information is not recorded or fed through the system in E to E. You can select which
VBI lines are erased by selecting the starting and ending line numbers between line 1 and
line 32. Blanking occurs after VITC is read.
To blank lines in the vertical interval:
1. Choose Video Input in the Configuration Manager Window. The Video Input dialog
box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Input page 2 of 3.
3. Select a video input from the list or click Select All to configure all the video inputs
at the same time.
4. Perform one of the following:
- If you do not want to erase any lines, clear the Erase lines between check box.
- If you want to erase lines in the vertical interval, select the Erase lines between
check box, then select the starting and ending lines numbers using the sliders.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
171
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
5. Click Finish to saving your settings.
172
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting freeze or black upon video input loss
Selecting freeze or black upon video input loss
You can select whether you want the Profile XP system to output black or freeze on the
last frame of video when the video input signal is lost.
To configure setting for loss of video input:
1. Choose Video Input in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Input
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Input page 3 of 3.
3. Select a video input from the list or click Select All to configure all video inputs at
the same time.
4. Under “What should the system do if the input signal is lost?”, choose the option
you want to use.
5. Choose Finish to saving your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
173
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Modifying video output settings
Use Configuration Manager to change video output settings
• Set up the VITC generator
• Erase unwanted lines in the vertical blanking interval
• Choose the lines that will contain Ancillary Data
• Erase the horizontal blanking interval
• Select whether the video output will freeze or display black when the video
output is lost.
Setting up the VITC generator
NOTE: The VITC/Blanking Setup page is only available when the system reference
is Reference Black, and the system has one or more SD output boards. Even when
present in the system, HD outputs do not appear on this page to prevent confusion.
All video outputs include VITC generators. You can select the line number used to insert
the VITC signals.
To set up the VITC generator:
1. Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Output
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 2 of 3.
3. Select a video outputs from the list or click Select All to configure all video outputs
at the same time.
174
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Setting up the VITC generator
4. Select the line numbers where the VITC pair should be generated using the Line 1,
Line 2 drop-down lists.
5. Click Finish to saving your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
175
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Erasing video output VBI information
NOTE: This information applies only to standard definition MPEG video.
You can remove unwanted VBI information that may be present in a recorded video clip
or on the output during E to E. You can select which VBI lines are erased by selecting
the starting and ending line numbers between line 1 and line 32. Blanking occurs before
VITC timecode is inserted.
To blank lines in the vertical interval:
1. Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager Window. The Video Output
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 2 of 3.
3. Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all the video
outputs at the same time.
4. Perform one of the following:
- If you do not want to erase any lines, clear the Erase lines between check box.
- If you want to erase lines in the vertical interval, select the Erase lines between
check box, then select the starting and ending lines numbers using the sliders.
176
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Ancillary Data insertion
Ancillary Data insertion
You can select the lines on which you insert Ancillary Data for each output. On standard
definition, you can also chose to insert VITC on the desired lines of the output
To insert ancillary data in the vertical interval:
1. Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager Window. The Video Output
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 2 of 3.
3. Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all the video
outputs at the same time.
4. Perform one of the following:
- If you do not want to insert any ancillary data, clear the Clear lines between
check box.
- If you want to insert ancillary data in the vertical interval, select the Clear lines
between check box, then select the starting and ending lines numbers using the
sliders.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
177
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
5. Click Finish to saving your settings.
178
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting freeze or black for video output signal loss
Selecting freeze or black for video output signal loss
You can select whether you want the Profile XP system to display black or freeze on the
last frame of video when the video output signal is lost.
To configure the setting for the loss of video output:
1. Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Output
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 3 of 3.
3. Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all the video
outputs at the same time.
4. Select the output signal loss option you want to use.
5. Click Finish to saving your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
179
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Erasing the horizontal blanking interval
You can configure a video output to erase the horizontal blanking interval. Use this
feature to remove ancillary data such as Error Detection and Handling (EDH)
information. Embedded audio present on the output is not effected.
To erase the horizontal blanking interval:
1. Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager Window. The Video Output
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 3 of 3.
3. Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all the video
outputs at the same time.
4. Select the Blank horizontal interval check box.
5. Click Finish to saving your settings.
180
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Renaming video I/Os in crosspoint lists
Renaming video I/Os in crosspoint lists
You can change the names of video inputs and outputs. This allows you to use more
meaningful names for them in the Channel Configuration dialog box.
Renaming the video inputs
To rename the video input:
1. Choose Video Input in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Input
dialog box appears.
2. Select a video input in the Video Inputs list.
3. Enter a name for the video input in the Video Input Name box or click Default to
restore the factory-default video input name.
4. Select another video input or click Finish to saving your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
181
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Renaming the video outputs
To rename the video output:
1. Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Output
dialog box appears.
2. Select a video output in the Video Output list.
3. Enter a name for the video output in the Video Output Name box or click Default to
restore the factory-default video output name.
4. Select another video output or click Finish to saving your settings.
182
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Configuring the video monitor output
Configuring the video monitor output
You can set up the text overlay and timecode burnin feature for the optional Video
Monitor board. Setup includes entering screen text and selecting text size and color
scheme best suited for your application.
Enabling or disabling dither on the Video Monitor output
The Video Monitor board truncates digital video data from 10 bits to 8 bits before
converting it to analog. Using dither in this process reduces the effect of quantization
noise on the Video Monitor output.
To enable dither:
1. Select Video Monitor in the Configuration Manager window. Page 1 of the Video
Monitor dialog box appears.
2. Choose a monitor output in the Video Monitor Setup list or click Select All.
3. Click the Dither output check box to enable dither for truncating 10 bit to 8 bit
video.
4. Click Finish to saving your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
183
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Enabling or disabling NTSC pedestal
When the Profile XP system is configured in the 525/60 standard, the Video Monitor
board generates NTSC signals. You can select whether or not the NTSC output includes
the 7.5 IRE pedestal. Use NTSC with Pedestal if your video monitors were calibrated
using signals with 7.5 IRE setup.
To enable or disable NTSC pedestal:
1. Select Video Monitor in the Configuration Manager window. Page 1 for the Video
Monitor dialog box appears.
2. Choose a monitor output in the Video Monitor Setup list, or click Select All.
3. Use the check box to enable or disable the 7.5 IRE pedestal as required.
4. Click Finish to save your settings.
184
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Configuring Text Overlay on the Video Monitor output
Configuring Text Overlay on the Video Monitor output
Use text overlay to generate characters on the Video Monitor outputs for source
identification. Depending on whether you choose large or small text size, you can
display the following:
Text Size
Number of
Text lines
Maximum Characters
per line
Large
6
21
Small
12
12
To configure text overlay:
1. Select Video Monitor in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Monitor
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Monitor page 2 of 2.
3. Choose a monitor output in the Video Monitor Setup list.
4. Select large or small text size, then click in the Text entry window and enter the text
you want to display on the monitor output.
NOTE: Changes in text formatting also affect the timecode burnin.
5. Select the text options; Bright or Outline. You may want to experiment to discover
which text options are the best suited for your application.
6. Choose a Transparent or Opaque text background using the Background
drop-down.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
185
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
7. Select another video monitor output to modify, or click Finish to saving your
settings.
Enabling Video Monitor timecode burn-in
You can enable timecode burnin on the Video Monitor outputs. Once enabled, you must
select a source of timecode for the Video Monitor output. To select the source of
timecode source, refer to “Selecting the video output as a timecode output for the
channel” on page 223.
To configure timecode burn-in:
1. Select Video Monitor in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Monitor
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Monitor page 2 of 2.
3. Choose a monitor output in the Video Monitor Setup list or click Select All.
4. Select the Show Time Code check box.
5. Select the text line number using the drop-down lists.
Twelve text lines are available for small text. Six lines are available for large text.
186
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Enabling Video Monitor timecode burn-in
6. Select timecode alignment using the drop-down list.
7. Select text formatting as desired. You may want to experiment with text formatting
to see what looks best in your application.
Changes in timecode text formatting also effect the text overlay.
8. Select another video monitor output to modify, or click Finish to save your settings.
NOTE: To select the source of video timecode for the video monitor output timecode
burn-in, refer to “Selecting the video output as a timecode output for the channel”
on page 223.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
187
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
Using multiple video tracks for one channel
You can assign multiple video tracks of the same compression type to a single channel.
You can use this feature when working with key and fill. To play out all tracks
simultaneously, you must be sure to play the clip on a play channel configured for at least
the same number of video tracks.
To add a video track to a channel:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window. The Channel
Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to modify, then click Add Track. The Add
Track dialog box appears
3. Select Video, then Add. The new video track icon (
configuration tree.
188
Profile XP System Guide
) will appear in the
13 May 2005
Using multiple video tracks for one channel
4. Select a video quality preset for the new track using the video quality list box. (This
setting is not applicable for DVCPRO 25, DVCPRO 50, or MPEG D10 channels.)
All video quality settings are shown in the following table. See “Selecting video
quality for a channel” on page 156 for guidelines on selecting video quality presets.
*
Quality Preset
MPEG-2 Data
rate in Mbps
(Standard Def)
MPEG-2 Data
rate in Mbps
(High Def)
Draft
4
Low
8
30
Medium (default)
15
50
High
24
80
Custom 1 to 4
4-50 in
increments of 4
(12 default)
Chrominance
Sampling
Method
Group of Pictures (GoP)
4:2:0*
IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP (PVS1000)
IBPBPBPBPBPB (PVS1100, PVS3000,
PVS3500)
4:2:2 (4:2:0
only in HD)
4:2:2 (default)
or 4:2:0
Choose from I, IP, IBP, IBBP, IBPBP,
IBBPBBP, IBPBPBPBP,
IBBPBBPBBP, IBBPBBPBBPBBP, and
IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP(PVS1000), or
I, IP, IBPB, IBPBPB, IBPBPBPB,
IBPBPBPBPB, and IBPBPBPBPBPB
(PVS1100, PVS3000, PVS3500)
Video recorded at 4:2:0 on the Video Processor board (PVS1100, PVS3000, and PVS3500) begins at line 23, and so
does not include VBI information such as VITC in the compressed video.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
189
Chapter 5
Modifying a Channel: Video Settings
5. Click Crosspoints, then do one or both of the following:
a. For channel types that include a Recorder, select a video input from the Video
Input check boxes.
b. For channel types that include a Player, select video outputs from the Video
Output(s) check boxes.
6. Click Finish to save your changes and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
190
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
You can customize audio settings for record or play channels. For example, you can
change the number of audio tracks per channel or change the input or output audio
format for a channel. This chapter describes how to modify your audio settings.
About Profile XP Audio
The Profile XP Media Platform supports from 16 to 32 channels of audio I/O and the
following audio formats:
• Embedded audio (up to 8 channels per video I/O)
• AES/EBU (interface chassis required)
• Analog (interface chassis required)
Determining the number of audio channels available
The Profile XP Media Platform audio system is built around the Audio board. A
Profile XP audio board provides 16 channels of audio I/O. A Profile XP may have up to
2 audio boards.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
191
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
Determining the audio formats available
The Profile XP system can be configured to operate with analog, AES/EBU digital, and
digital embedded (SMPTE 272M Level A) audio. An interface chassis is required for
analog audio and AES/EBU digital audio as shown in the table. If you are using only
embedded audio, no interface chassis is required.
NOTE: Interface chassis must be connected to both Audio boards for operation
with 32 channels of analog or AES/EBU digital audio.
Audio Chassis
Modelsa
PAC216
(includes PACXLR
breakout chassis)
Number of
AES/EBU
Audio
Channels
Comments
16
16
The 16 audio channels on the Profile XP audio
board are divided into eight audio pairs. You
can assign the input for each audio pair to
either the analog or digital inputs of the
PAC216. For example, the input to channels
1 & 2 can be assigned to analog input 1 & 2 or
digital input 1 & 2 on the PAC216. The audio
output channels 1 to 16 are always assigned to
both analog and digital outputs 1 to 16 on the
PAC216.
XLR216
none
16
Provides digital audio interface using XLR
connectors.
BNC216
none
16
Provides digital audio interface using BNC
connectors.
a.
192
Number of
Analog
Audio
Channels
See Appendix C for detailed rear panel views of the audio interface chassis.
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Adding or removing audio tracks
Adding or removing audio tracks
All audio configuration is done using audio channel pairs. Therefore, adding or
removing audio tracks in the Channel Configuration dialog box adds or removes a pair
of audio tracks.
After adding audio tracks you must select an audio channel pair to use for the tracks.
Removing audio tracks
To remove audio tracks:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Select the tab for the channel you want to configure.
3. Select an audio Track pair under the Audio icon (
) in the configuration tree.
4. Click the Delete Track button in the configuration tree.
5. Click Finish to save your changes.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
193
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
Adding audio tracks
To add audio tracks:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Select the tab for the channel you want to configure.
3. Select Audio icon ( ) in the configuration tree. The Audio Channels list appears
at the bottom of the Channel Configuration dialog box.
4. Click the Add Track button. The Add Track dialog box that appears.
194
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Adding audio tracks
5. Select Audio, then click Add. The new audio track pair icon appears in the
configuration tree.
6. Use the check boxes in the Audio Channels list to assign an audio channel I/O pair.
Refer to “Using the Channel Configuration dialog box” on page 119 for
information on why some Audio Channels appear dimmed, red, or “in use”.
NOTE: You can verify the audio format of an audio channel pair. Refer to
“Changing the audio I/O format” on page 197.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
195
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
Selecting audio channels for an audio track
In order to record or play audio, you must assign audio channels to the audio tracks you
add. After assigning audio channels you need to confirm the audio routing for the audio
channel.
To select audio channels for each audio track:
1. Double click the Audio icon (
) to expand the configuration tree.
2. Select the audio Track icon in the configuration tree.
3. Select a pair of audio channels for each audio track by placing a check in the
appropriate check box.
You can change the audio format for the audio channels using Configuration
Manager. Refer to “Changing the audio I/O format” on page 197.
4. Click Finish to save your settings.
196
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Changing the audio I/O format
Changing the audio I/O format
This section describes how to select the audio I/O format you need for your system.The
Profile XP system can be configured to operate with analog, AES/EBU digital, and
digital embedded (SMPTE 272M Level A) audio.
An interface chassis is required for analog audio and AES/EBU digital audio (see
“About Profile XP Audio” on page 191). If you are using only embedded audio, no
interface chassis is required.
Select audio input format
To select audio input format:
1. Click Audio Routing in the Configuration Manager window. The Audio Input
Routing dialog box appears.
2. Select the audio input format for each audio channel pair.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
197
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
3. If you selected embedded audio format, perform the following steps for each audio
channel input pair requiring embedded audio:
a. Click the left-hand drop-down list arrow in the Embedded column for the
channel pair you want to configure, and select a video input as shown.
NOTE: With one audio board, only the first 4 video inputs are selectable.
b. Click the right-hand drop-down list arrow in the Embedded column for the
channel pair you want to configure, and select an audio group and channel pair
as shown.
NOTE: Up to two audio groups (8 audio channels) can be extracted from a single
video input.
3. Click Finish to save your settings.
198
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Select audio output format
Select audio output format
There are no output routing selections to make if you are using Analog or AES/EBU
audio. These formats are selected automatically when the system sees the audio interface
attached.
If you are using embedded audio, you must make embedded audio selections as follows.
To select embedded audio output selections:
1. Click Audio Routing in the Configuration Manager window. The Audio Routing
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Page 2 of the Audio Routing dialog box as shown.
3. Select the check box in the Embedded column for all Profile XP audio channels that
require embedded audio.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
199
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
7. Click the left-hand drop-down list arrow in the Embedded column for the channel pair
you want to configure, and select a video output as shown.
NOTE: With one audio board, only the first 4 video outputs are selectable, since
embedded audio can only be allocated by groups of 4 channels. With two audio
boards, up to 8 video outputs are selectable. In some cases (two audio boards and
either three 2In/2Out boards or one 2In/2Out and one 4Out board), you may have
to select embedded audio outputs first, then select the audio inputs for each audio
board to be able to select all the desired embedded outputs.
8. Click the right-hand drop-down list arrow in the Embedded column for the channel
pair you want to configure, and select an audio group and channel pair as shown.
NOTE: Up to two audio groups (8 audio channels) can be embedded on a single
video output.
9. Click Finish to save your settings.
200
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Checking AES/EBU input status
Checking AES/EBU input status
The Audio Input dialog box in Configuration Manager allows you to check AES/EBU
input status.
To view AES/EBU input status:
1. Click Audio Input in Configuration Manager. The Audio Input dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Audio Input page 2.
3. Select the AES/EBU pair. The following signal status is shown:
Indicator
Description
Unlocked Error
receiver locked
Validity Error
AES receiver validity
Parity Error
parity error
CRC
CRC subframe errors
Emphasis
detected emphasis
4. Click Finish or Cancel.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
201
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
Selecting incoming digital audio coding format
The Profile XP Media Platform provides a choice of compressed or uncompressed audio
I/O formats which provide flexibility in managing the quality and storage needs of your
system.The digital audio coding formats supported include:
• 16 bit or 24 bit PCM (PAC216 requires one of these)
• AC-3 (Dolby D)
• Dolby E
• Data
You must select the coding format for each audio channel I/O pair to meet the
requirements of your system. For example, select Dolby E if your incoming audio is
compressed using Dolby E. Selecting an audio coding format ensures the audio is
processed and stored appropriately.
To select incoming digital audio coding format:
1. Select Audio Routing in the Configuration Manager window. The Audio Routing
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Audio Routing page 3.
3. Select an audio pair from the list, or click Select All.
4. Select the audio storage format as required by your system, then click Finish.
202
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Adjusting audio delay
Adjusting audio delay
You can adjust the fixed audio delay through the Profile XP system in order to meet
system requirements. Audio delay adjustment range is from 0 to 2 fields. Adjust audio
delay by selecting an audio delay preset or by selecting custom and entering the number
of audio samples of delay between 0 and 2 fields.
Selecting audio delay presets
To select fixed audio delay:
1. Select Audio Routing in the Configuration Manager window. The Audio Routing
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Audio Routing page 3.
3. Select an audio pair from the list, or click Select All.
4. Select a fixed audio delay preset using the drop-down list.
Audio presets shown are for the 525 video standard. Presets for 625 video standard
are 0 samples (0 fields), 960 samples (1 field), and 1020 samples (2 fields).
5. Click Finish to save your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
203
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
Selecting custom audio delay
To select custom audio delay:
1. Select Audio Routing in the Configuration Manager window. The Audio Routing
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Audio Routing page 3.
3. Select an audio pair from the list, or click Select All.
4. Select Custom in the audio delay drop-down list. The audio samples edit box
appears.
5. Enter the fixed audio delay in number of audio samples from 0 to 2 fields in the
samples text box.
Audio Delay
525/60 Video
Standard
625/50 Video
Standard
1 field
800 samples
960 samples
2 fields
1600 samples
1920 samples
6. Click Finish to save your settings.
204
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Adjusting analog audio input level
Adjusting analog audio input level
You can use the analog input gain adjustment to correct the analog audio input signal
level. For instance, you can use the input gain adjustment to correct input audio level
before recording the source signal.
To adjust analog audio input level:
1. Select Analog Audio Input in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Select an audio input in the list to adjust or click Select All to adjust all inputs.
3. Use the slider in the Analog Audio Input dialog box to adjust input level.
Overload clipping
indicates the audio level is greater than +23dbu.
4. Click Finish.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
205
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
Adjusting analog audio output level
You can use the analog audio output level adjustment to correct analog audio signal level
to meet your system requirements.
1. Select Analog Audio Output in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Select an audio output in the list to adjust or click Select All to adjust all inputs.
3. Use the slider in the Analog Audio Output dialog box to adjust the output level.
NOTE: Values above 0db have no affect when using the PAC216B.
4. Click Finish to save your settings.
206
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Muting analog audio outputs
Muting analog audio outputs
You can mute analog audio outputs when they are not being used. Selecting mute
disables the audio output in the PAC200 and reduces the risk of output noise occurring
when audio inputs are not driven with an input signal.
To mute the analog audio output:
1. Select Audio Output in the Configuration Manager window. The Audio Output
dialog box appears.
2. Select an audio output in the list to adjust, or click Select All.
3. Click the Mute check box to mute the output.
4. Click Finish to save your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
207
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
Selecting analog audio output line mode
You can select single ended or balanced line modes for the analog audio outputs.
To select analog audio line mode:
1. Select Audio Output in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Select an audio output in the list, or click Select All.
3. Select the Line Mode using the Line Mode drop-down list.
4. Click Finish to save your settings.
208
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting audio reference level
Selecting audio reference level
The audio reference level is used by Profile applications to scale audio level meters.
Setting the audio reference level determines the absolute value at 0db.
To set the audio reference level, select Audio Reference Level in the Configuration
Manager window, then select the audio reference level used at your facility.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
209
Chapter 6
Modifying a Channel: Audio Settings
Changing how audio sounds during jog
You can change how the audio system plays audio during jog or off-speed play by
changing the audio window size. The audio window is a segment of audio that is heard
when you move through a clip. You can specify the size of the window, and thus the
amount of the audio that you hear, by selecting a number of fields.
To set the audio window size:
1. Select the Audio icon in the configuration tree.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to modify.
3. Click the Audio icon (
).
4. Use the Audio Window Size drop-down list to select a field size from the five
available choices: -5 fields plays five fields once, then silence, 0 plays silence
during jog operations, and 5, 10, and 20 fields play the specified number of fields
continuously until you press stop, play, or pause in your controlling application.
5. Click Finish to save changes.
210
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
You can customize timecode settings for your record or play channels. For example, you
can change the number of timecode tracks per channel or change the timecode source
and destinations. This chapter describes how to modify your timecode settings.
About Profile XP series timecode
To record or play timecode, you must assign one or more timecode tracks to the channel
using Configuration Manager. After adding a timecode track, you can choose the
timecode source or destination for the track.
Timecode sources include four LTC inputs, internal timecode generators and VITC.
VITC can be read on all standard video inputs including the system reference input. If
ancillary data is present in the video stream, time code can also be read from that data.
Timecode outputs include four LTC outputs and VITC on any standard video output or
high definition output.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
211
Chapter 7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
Using the internal timecode generators
Profile XP software provides a timecode generator for each Profile XP channel. The
internal timecode generator appears as a source in the timecode input list for each
channel. You can configure how the timecode generator runs, such as drop frame or
non-drop frame, fixed or time of day. The timecode generators are referenced to the
Applications Processor real-time clock.
Selecting the internal generator as a timecode source
To select internal generators as the source for timecode:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Select the tab for the channel you want to configure.
3. Select a timecode Track under the Timecode icon ( ) in the configuration tree,
then click the Crosspoints button. The Timecode Input and Output check boxes
appear at the bottom of the Channel Configuration dialog box.
4. Select the TC Generator check box under Timecode Input list.
5. Proceed to “Setting up an internal timecode generator” on page 215 to set up the
timecode generator or click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel
Configuration dialog box.
212
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Using the same TC generator for multiple channels
Using the same TC generator for multiple channels
To use the same timecode generator on two or more channels, you must use the
TC Generator button on each channel tab to select the same timecode codec for each
channel.
To select the same internal generator:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to configure.
3. Select a Timecode icon (
) in the configuration tree
4. Click the Crosspoints button, then select the TC Generator check box in the
Timecode Input list. This enables the TC Generator button.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
213
Chapter 7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
5. Click the TC Generator button, then select a TC Generator from the list.
NOTE: Do not select “Any”. Choose a specific timecode generator and then
remember to use it for all subsequent channels you configure.
6. Repeat step 2 through step 5 for each channel that will use the same timecode
generator.
7. Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
Refer to “Setting up an internal timecode generator” on page 215 to configure the
timecode generator.
214
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Setting up an internal timecode generator
Setting up an internal timecode generator
When you select “TC Generator” as your timecode source, there are several other settings that
you can make to the timecode generator. The controls for making these settings are available
only when the timecode input is “TC Generator,” otherwise, the generator controls are
dimmed.
Changes you make to the timecode generator apply only to the current channel unless you
have selected the same time code generator for another channel (see “Using the same TC
generator for multiple channels” on page 213).
To change the timecode generator settings:
1. With a timecode Track selected in the configuration tree, click the TC Generator
button. The timecode generator panel appears. The controls are dimmed except
when “TC Generator” is the timecode input.
NOTE: Leave the Timecode Generator selection to “Any” unless you are using the
same generator for two or more channels. Refer to “Using the same TC generator
for multiple channels” on page 213.
2. Choose a generator mode. You can start timecode using a fixed time or the time of
day. Click Time of Day to use the Applications Processor Windows NT clock, or
click Fixed Start Time to set a timecode value under Starting Value.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
215
Chapter 7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
3. If you selected fixed time, you can use the default of 00:00:00:00
(Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames) under Starting Value or set a new fixed starting
time. This setting takes effect the next time you click the Record button.
NOTE: The Drop Frame control is hidden if your Profile system is configured for
the 625 video standard.
4. To choose drop frame, click on the Drop Frame check box. To compensate for the
29.97 frame rate in NTSC, drop-frame timecode synchronizes the rate with elapsed
time. Drop-frame timecode drops two frames per minute, except on the tenth
minute. PAL, on the other hand, has a constant rate of 25 frames per second and
never requires drop-frame timecode.
5. Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
216
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Recording VITC
Recording VITC
The system reference input and all video inputs have VITC readers. To record VITC, you
must first select the reference input or a video input as a timecode source. For standard
definition inputs, you must then verify that the VITC reader for the input is set up
properly to read VITC.
Selecting a VITC input for a channel
To select VITC as the timecode source:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to configure.
3. Click on a timecode track in the configuration tree or click Add Track to add a new
one.
4. Click the Crosspoints button, then select the VITC source in the Timecode Input
list.
5. Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
6. To set up the VITC reader for the VITC source you selected, refer to “Setting up
the VITC reader on a Video Input” on page 219, or “Setting up the VITC reader on
the Reference Input” on page 221.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
217
Chapter 7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
Recording timecode from ancillary data
If your video source contains ancillary data, you can extract the timecode information
from the ancillary data and record it on the timecode track for subsequent playout. The
timecode data remains part of the ancillary data, and is also recorded as data if you set
up a data track.
To record timecode from timecode ancillary data:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to configure.
3. Click on a timecode track in the configuration tree or click Add Track to add a new
one.
4. Click the Crosspoints button, then select the video source containing the ancillary
data in the Timecode Input list.
5. Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
218
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Setting up the VITC reader on a Video Input
Setting up the VITC reader on a Video Input
NOTE: This page appears only if the system reference source is Reference Black
and one or more standard definition SDI boards are installed. HD SDI inputs do
not appear in the VITC Setup list because VITC, as Ancillary Data, is not
line-specific.
The VITC reader has two detection modes: Automatic and Manual. When you select
automatic detection, you can set the range of vertical interval lines scanned to find the
VITC signal pair; lines 10 to 21 by default. Manual allows you to choose specific line
numbers to detect the VITC signals. Automatic detection is the default setting. Use
automatic detection unless there are two sets of VITC on the input signal.
To set up the video input VITC reader:
1. Select Video Input in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Input dialog
box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Input page 2 of 3.
3. Select a video input from the list or click Select All to configure all video inputs at
the same time.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
219
Chapter 7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
4. Select one of the VITC timecode options as follows:
- Auto Detection - Select the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box, then
type or select the range of lines you want the system to search for VITC.
- Manual Detection - Clear the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box,
then type or select the line numbers where the VITC pair can be found.
5. Click Finish to save your settings.
220
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Setting up the VITC reader on the Reference Input
Setting up the VITC reader on the Reference Input
The VITC reader has two detection modes: Automatic and Manual. When you select
automatic detection, you can set the range of vertical interval lines scanned to find the
VITC signal pair; lines 10 to 21 by default. Manual allows you to choose specific line
numbers to detect the VITC signals. Automatic detection is the default setting. Use
automatic detection unless there are two sets of VITC on the input signal.
To set up the Reference Input VITC reader:
1. Select Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Timing
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 3 of 3.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
221
Chapter 7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
3. Select one of the VITC timecode options as follows:
- Auto Detection - Select the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box, then
enter the range of lines you want the system to search for VITC using the sliders.
- Manual Detection - Clear the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box,
then type or select the line numbers where the VITC pair can be found.
4. Click Finish to save your settings.
222
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Generating VITC on a video output
Generating VITC on a video output
To generate VITC on a video output, you must:
• Select the video output as a timecode output for the channel.
• Set up the VITC generator on the output for the correct vertical interval lines.
Selecting the video output as a timecode output for the channel
To select VITC as the timecode output:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to configure.
3. Click on a timecode track in the configuration tree or click Add Track to add a new
one.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
223
Chapter 7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
4. Select SDI-VITC-Out in the Timecode Output list.
NOTE: The video outputs listed in the Timecode Output list correspond to those
assigned to the channel. For example, SDI-VITC-OutA-J7 is listed in the following
figure because SDI-OutA-J7 is selected as the video output for the channel. If you
change the video output for a channel, the Timecode Output list also changes.
5. Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
224
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Setting up the VITC generator on a video output
Setting up the VITC generator on a video output
NOTE: This page appears only if the system reference source is Reference Black
and one or more standard definition SDI boards are installed. HD SDI outputs do
not appear in the VITC Setup list because VITC, as Ancillary Data, is not
line-specific.
To set up the VITC generator:
1. Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager window. The Video Output
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 2 of 3.
3. Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all video inputs
at the same time.
6. Type or select the line numbers where the VITC signals should be generated using
the Line 1, Line 2 drop-down lists.
4. Click Finish save your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
225
Chapter 7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
Deleting unwanted VITC and other VBI signals
You can remove unwanted VITC signals that may be present in a recorded video clip or
on the output during E to E. You can select which lines are cleared, which you would
typically do if you are inserting ancillary data on your output. Blanking level is inserted
in place of the VBI information. Lines are erased before ancillary data is inserted.
To erase data from vertical blanking lines:
1. Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager Window. The Video Output
dialog box appears.
2. Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 2 of 3.
3. Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all the video
outputs at the same time.
226
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Deleting unwanted VITC and other VBI signals
4. Perform one of the following:
- If you do not want to erase any lines, clear the Erase lines between check box.
- If you want to erase lines in the vertical interval, select the Erase lines between
check box, then select the starting and ending line numbers using the sliders.
5. Click Finish to save your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
227
Chapter 7
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
Recording or generating LTC
The Profile XP system provides four LTC inputs and outputs. Use Configuration
Manager to setup a channel to record or output LTC.
To set up a channel to read or generate LTC:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to configure.
3. Click on a timecode track in the configuration tree or click Add Track to add a new
one.
4. Click the Crosspoints button, then do one or both of the following:
- Select one of the LTC inputs to use as the timecode source for the channel.
- Select one of the LTC outputs to use as the timecode output for the channel.
5. Click Finish to save your settings.
228
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Select a timecode source for timecode burn-in
Select a timecode source for timecode burn-in
After enabling the timecode burn-in on the optional Video Monitor board, you must
select a timecode source for the Video Monitor output using Channel Configuration
dialog box. (For information on enabling the timecode burn-in, see “Enabling Video
Monitor timecode burn-in” on page 186.)
To select timecode source for the Video Monitor burn-in:
1. Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to configure.
3. Click on a timecode track in the configuration tree, or click Add Track to add a new
one.
4. Click the Crosspoints button, then select the Video Monitor output listed in the
Timecode Output list.
NOTE: The Video Monitor is displayed in the Timecode Output list when it is
assigned to the channel as a video output. For example, MonitorTC-OutA-J11, is
listed in the following figure because Monitor-OutA-J11 is selected as a video
output for the channel. Refer to “Selecting the video I/Os used by a channel” on
page 155 for instructions on selecting the video outputs for a channel.
5. Click Finish to save your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
229
Chapter 7
230
Modifying a Channel: Timecode Settings
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
8
Modifying a Channel: Ancillary Data
You can record and play back ancillary data on your high definition record or play
channels. You can also extract time code from ancillary data and record it as either LTC
or VITC, and play it back in that form. This chapter describes how to set up your system
to record and play ancillary data.
About Profile XP series ancillary data
The ancillary data supported by the Profile XP media platform for high definition video
complies with the following SMPTE standards or recommended procedures:
• SMPTE 291M-1998, Ancillary Data Packet and Space Formatting, the standard
which defines the formatting of the data packets in the serial digital video stream.
• SMPTE 334M, Vertical Ancillary Data Mapping for Bit-Serial Interface, which
contains the DID/SDID assignments for the “standard data types.”
• RP 188-1996, Transmission of Time Code and Control Code in the Ancillary Data
Space of a Digital Television Data Stream.
To record or play ancillary data, you first use the Configuration Manager to assign an
ancillary data track to the channel. You must also select a video input and output for the
track as appropriate for the channel configuration.
When recording, all ancillary data included in the serial bit stream is recorded in its
native format. Only time code can be extracted and stored separately. When the clip is
played, all its associated ancillary data is included in the serial bit stream if ancillary data
is configured on the output.
The Profile XP system ability to capture ancillary data packets is dependent on your
configuration. Please contact your Grass Valley representative to discuss your specific
requirements.
In all cases, packet overhead is included in the capacity. If more data is present on the
input, the later data is dropped and NetCentral is notified to alert you that this condition
occurred.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
231
Chapter 8
Modifying a Channel: Ancillary Data
Adding an ancillary data track
To add an ancillary data track to a channel:
1. Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window. The
Channel Configuration dialog box appears.
6. Click the tab for the channel you want to modify.
2. Select the Data icon ( ) in the configuration tree and click the Add Track button.
The Add Track dialog box appears.
3. Select the Data option in the Add Track dialog box, then click Add. A new data
track appears in the configuration tree under the Data icon.
232
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Selecting the video I/Os used for ancillary data
Selecting the video I/Os used for ancillary data
To assign a video input and output for an ancillary data track:
1. Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window. The
Channel Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Click the tab for the channel you want to modify.
3. Click the Data icon ( ) in the configuration tree, then click the data Track1 you
want to configure. If there are no data tracks, go to the instructions for adding an
ancillary data track.
4. Click the Crosspoints button, then select the video input and video output you
want to use. A video output will only appear in the list if it has been selected on a
video track for this channel.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
233
Chapter 8
Modifying a Channel: Ancillary Data
For information on why resources appear dimmed, red, or “in use”, refer to “Why
resources appear dimmed, red, or in use” on page 122.
5. Click Finish to save your changes and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
NOTE: If the channel is currently in use by an application, it must be reselected
within the application before your changes will take effect. Refer to the user manual
for the Profile application you are using.
234
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Removing an ancillary data track
Removing an ancillary data track
To remove an ancillary data track from a channel:
1. Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window.
2. Select the tab for the channel you want to configure.
3. Select the data Track that you want to remove under the ancillary data icon (
the configuration tree.
) in
4. Click the Delete Track button.
5. Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
235
Chapter 8
236
Modifying a Channel: Ancillary Data
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
9
Managing Optional Licenses
Some of the features of the Profile XP Media Platform are enabled through a special
software license. For example, the Agile Output (Definition Independent) capability of
the MPEG HD decoder found in the PVS2000, PVS3000, and PVS3500 series is only
available when you purchase and install the optional license.
In some cases, such as the PVS3500, optional licenses are installed at the factory. If you
wish to add licenses after you receive your Profile XP Media Platform, you must obtain
your license from your Grass Valley representative and install it using the SabreTooth
License Manager.
Optional software licenses are managed through the SabreTooth License Manager,
which is installed with Profile System Software. License information is stored in XML
files that you can manage just like any other file on your system. Licenses are unique to
the system for which they are requested, and cannot be used on any other machine.
NOTE: Licenses are based on your system’s unique identifier, which is partially
derived from your system’s Media Access Control (MAC) address. If you change
your system’s MAC address by performing operations such as changing the System
Processor card, or adding a dual-port Ethernet card, you must obtain a new license
based on the new MAC address.
You can use the SabreTooth License Manager to perform the following tasks:
• Add a new license (import)
• Archive existing licenses (export)
• Delete a license
Enabling optional features
You can enable optional features on your Profile XP Media Platform by purchasing the
appropriate licenses. Since it may take a day or two to process your order, you can obtain
a temporary license that enables the feature for a limited time. You can use this
temporary license to evaluate the feature, to start using the feature immediately when
you purchase a license, or to temporarily re-enable the feature on a system that was
repaired by replacing the System Processor board, or the system hard disk or its contents
(drive rebuild). If the system is repaired, you must obtain a new permanent license.
The typical licensing sequence is as follows:
1. Use the License Request Wizard to generate a License Request file.
2. Provide the License Request file to your Grass Valley representative and purchase
the desired license.
3. When you receive your license, add it to the SabreTooth license manager.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
237
Chapter 9
Managing Optional Licenses
Requesting a license
Optional software licenses are unique to the system for which they are purchased. They
cannot be used on any other system. This requires that you provide a generated unique
ID for the desired system to Grass Valley, which is then used to create your unique
license.
To obtain an optional software license:
1. Open the Licensing page by clicking License Configuration in Configuration
Manager.
2. Right-click the desired optional software feature, then choose Request License to
start the License Request Wizard.
NOTE: The Licensing page displays only those software options that may be
installed on your current hardware. To view all available options, including those
that require hardware upgrades, select Show Non-Applicable Licenses.
238
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Requesting a license
3. Read the on-screen instructions, then click Next to proceed to the customer
information screen.
4. Enter all of the information requested on this page. You must provide a valid email
address to receive your license file. Click Next to continue.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
239
Chapter 9
Managing Optional Licenses
5. Enter the requested information. Your system serial number is located on the rear
panel label, and is required to obtain a license. Most licenses are NodeLocked,
apply to 1 system. and are valid Forever. Choose these options unless otherwise
instructed by your Grass Valley representative. Click Next to continue.
6. Read the Disclaimer, then select I Accept the Disclaimer and choose Finish.
240
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Requesting a license
7. The resulting text contains all the information required to issue a license for the
desired option. Click Copy To Clipboard so that you can paste this text into an
appropriately named file that you email to your Grass Valley representative. You
can also paste the text directly into an email message, but you may wish to keep a
copy of the message for your records.
8. Email the text information to your Grass Valley representative.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
241
Chapter 9
Managing Optional Licenses
Adding a license
Your software license is provided as an XML file. Use the SabreTooth License Manager
to add this file to your system and enable the desired feature.
To add a license:
1. Click License Configuration in Configuration Manager, then click Launch
LicenseManager to open the SabreTooth License Manager.
2. Drag and drop the XML file onto the SabreTooth License Manager, or choose File
| Import and navigate to the file location to open the XML file.
242
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Deleting licenses
Deleting licenses
Deleting a license immediately disables the feature that it enabled. You may wish to
delete a temporary license prior to its expiry if you have decided not to purchase the
feature.
To delete a license:
1. Select the license in the SabreTooth License Manager.
2. Choose Edit| Delete to delete the license.
Archiving licenses
You may wish to archive your licenses to a secure location. This will allow you to
quickly re-install a license should you inadvertently delete it.
To archive a license:
1. Select the license in the SabreTooth License Manager.
2. Choose File | Export to open the Save As dialog box.
3. Assign a meaningful name to the file, and save it to the desired location. You may
want to save the file to a diskette and keep it in a safe place.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
243
Chapter 9
244
Managing Optional Licenses
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
10
Controlling the Profile XP Remotely
Profile XP Series record and play channels can be controlled remotely through RS-422
control protocols or by remote applications over Ethernet. This chapter describes how to
set up the Profile XP for the control mode you want to use.
Some third-party applications also support the General Purpose Interface (GPI). Refer to
your vendor’s documentation for instructions on using GPI triggers.
The Profile XP remote control capability is summarized in the following table:
a.
13 May 2005
Control
Method
Application to Use
Control Protocols
Available
Section in this chapter to use:
RS-422
VdrPanel
VDCP
Odetics Protocol
BVW Protocol
“Setting up RS-422 remote control in
VdrPanel” on page 246
RS-422
Prolink
Profile Protocol
“Setting up RS-422 remote control using
Prolink” on page 249
Ethernet
Network
Configuration Manager
Tool Box Editor
List Manager
TimeDelay
NA
“Running PortServer to enable remote
operation” on page 251
RS-422
or
Ethernet
Network
AMP application
AMPa
“Setting up AMP remote control” on
page 252
“Using the AMP application for local
control” on page 254
Advanced Media Protocol (AMP) - AMP is an extension of the Odetics protocol.
Profile XP System Guide
245
Chapter 10
Controlling the Profile XP Remotely
Setting up RS-422 remote control in VdrPanel
After selecting record or play channels in VdrPanel, you can configure them for RS-422
remote control. The RS-422 protocols available in VdrPanel include:
• VDCP
• Odetics Protocol
• BVW Protocol
Make RS-422 connections as described in the installation guide you received with your
Profile XP Series system, then use the information in this section to select the control
protocol and communications port you want to use.
To setup VdrPanel for RS-422 remote control:
1. Start VdrPanel using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start | Programs | Profile
Applications | VdrPanel. The VdrPanel window appears.
2. In VdrPanel, click in the panel you want to set up for remote control.
246
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Setting up RS-422 remote control in VdrPanel
3. Choose Controller | Configure to open the Channel Configuration dialog box, then
select a control protocol using the Protocol drop-down list as shown.
4. Select a serial port using the port select drop-down list as shown. COM1 and
COM2 are RS-232 ports on the Profile XP rear panel. P1 through P8 are RS-422
ports on the I/O Panel.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
247
Chapter 10
Controlling the Profile XP Remotely
5. Click OK in the Channel Configuration dialog box.
6. Repeat step 2 through step 5 for the remaining panels.
7. Test the system using your automation controller.
8. Test the Profile XP remote control using your controller. Refer to Chapter 12,
“Solving Common Setup Problems” for help if you have a problem.
248
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Setting up RS-422 remote control using Prolink
Setting up RS-422 remote control using Prolink
Prolink is an application that monitors Profile protocol over the RS-422 communication
ports, allowing you to control the Profile XP with devices that use Profile protocol.
Make RS-422 connections as described in the installation guide you received with your
Profile XP system, then use the information in this section to set up Prolink and to learn
more about the Prolink user interface.
How to set up Prolink
To set up Prolink:
1. Start Prolink using the shortcut on the desktop or by selecting Start | Programs |
Profile Applications | Prolink. The port selection dialog box appears.
2. Select an RS-422 serial port in the port selection dialog box (P1-P8), then click OK.
The Prolink window appears as shown.
3. Repeat step 2, if required for your controller, for the remaining channels you want
to operate using Profile protocol.
NOTE: Some control devices require one physical RS-422 port for each channel
operated by the controller, while other controllers use only one RS-422 port to
control all channels (up to 8 total) operated by the controller. Refer to your vendor’s
documentation for instructions.
4. Test the Profile XP system using your controller. See the following section for an
overview of the Prolink communications window.
Refer to Chapter 12, “Solving Common Setup Problems” for help if you have a
problem.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
249
Chapter 10
Controlling the Profile XP Remotely
Overview of the Prolink communications window
The Prolink communications window is used to display information about the status of
Profile XP system under control.
Status information displayed in the Prolink windows includes:
➊
➋
Channel Name -
A channel name is displayed when the controller or control
application acquires channel resources using a predefined channel created in Profile
Configuration Manager.
Connection Number - A port number is displayed when the controller or control
application acquires channel resources using the Profile API rather than using
channels created in Profile Configuration Manager.
➌
Channel or Port Status - indicates
➍
Frame Count
➎
Clip Name - shows the name
➏
Communications Port Status -
transport status such as play, record, or idle.
- indicates the frame count of the current frame.
of the clip currently loaded.
indicates activity on the RS-422 port.
➍
➊
➎
➋
➌
➏
250
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Running PortServer to enable remote operation
Running PortServer to enable remote operation
PortSever allows you to control a Profile XP remotely using Ethernet. If you want to
control or configure the Profile XP over the Ethernet network from a remote system, or
transfer media to or from a Profile XP system through the video network, you must have
PortServer running on all remote Profile XP systems before performing these
operations.
After starting PortServer, see the Profile XP User Manual for instructions on how to
connect to a remote Profile XP system in the Profile application you are using.
To start PortServer to enable remote operation over Ethernet:
Start PortServer by double-click the PortServer desktop shortcut or choose Start |
Profile Applications | PortServer.
The PortServer shortcut is set up to run minimized. Notice, the PortServer icon
label on the taskbar dynamically displays the number of remote connections
Number of
remote
connections
The Portserver window also displays the number of remote connections to the
Profile XP system as well as other communications related messages.
PortServer must be left running on all remote systems as long as remote access is
needed.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
251
Chapter 10
Controlling the Profile XP Remotely
Setting up AMP remote control
You can use Advanced Media Protocol (AMP) to control a Profile XP system channel.
This protocol is an extension of the Odetics protocol and is supported through the
Profile XP AMP application. External control devices can be connected via rear panel
RS-422 serial connectors, or an Ethernet network connection.
The AMP application acquires a single channel (Play, Record, or Play-Record) at a time.
The AMP application interface runs in the following modes:
• Local control mode — The Profile XP channel can be controlled by either the local
AMP application or by third party applications such as a hardware controller or a
software application.
• Status mode — The Profile XP channel is controlled by a remote third party
application and the local AMP application only monitors activities on the channel.
When you are using a remote third party application, AMP protocol supports the use of
a two-head model in that two clips are loaded simultaneously, as follows:
• Active clip — The AMP “preset id” is considered the active clip that controls
channel resources.
• Preview clip — The AMP “preview preset id” is considered the preview clip.
Generally the preview clip begins playing after the active clip completes, at
which point the preview clip becomes the active clip.
Configuring AMP protocol control
To configure a Profile XP channel for control by the AMP protocol, do the following:
1. Make sure that the channel you intend to control by the AMP protocol is not
currently allocated to an application.
2. Open C:/profile/ampclient.exe. The AMP application opens.
252
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Configuring AMP protocol control
3. Click the Configure button,
- or On the File menu, click Configure. The Configure dialog box opens.
4. On the Channel drop-down list, select the local Profile XP channel to be controlled
by AMP protocol.
5. Select either RS422 or Ethernet for the type of communication you are using for
AMP protocol. If you select RS422, also select the Port you are using.
6. Click OK to save changes and close. If the selected channel is currently allocated
to another application, a message informs you that it is not available.
After a pause (indicated by “Connecting…Please wait” in the status bar) the selected
channel is allocated to the AMP protocol. The channel remains allocated as long as the
AMP application remains open.
You can now control the Profile XP channel with the AMP protocol using a remote AMP
application or device. To control the channel with the AMP protocol using the local
AMP application, continue with the next section “Using the AMP application for local
control”.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
253
Chapter 10
Controlling the Profile XP Remotely
Using the AMP application for local control
Open the AMP application at C:/profile/ampclient.exe. To use the AMP application for
local control, a channel must first be allocated as in “Setting up AMP remote control” on
page 252. Toggle to the local control mode by clicking the L\R button.
The following describes the controls and indicators used in the local control mode.
2 Clip/Preview
Timecode
4 Eject
Clip
3 Clip Name &
Current Bin
1 Control
Buttons
5 Active/Preview Button
(Click to toggle
between active
& preview clip)
254
6 Time Dome
8 Mark-In &
Mark-Out
7 Transport
Controls
9 Length
10 Local/Remote
Control Mode
Toggle
Control
Description and User Operation
X
Control Buttons
(The control buttons
function the same as the File
menu items.)
New Clip – Used to create and name a clip prior to starting the
recording. A default clip name is generated by incrementing some
seed name, for example, Clip_2 if the last clip created was Clip_1.
To rename the clip, click the clip name and enter a new name.
Load – Select to open the Load dialog, which displays the contents
of the current bin. Select a clip, then choose Load. See “Loading a
clip” on page 256.
Options – Opens the Options dialog box. See “Setting Options” on
page 255.
Configure – Opens the Configure dialog box. See “Configuring
AMP protocol control” on page 252.
Y
Clip/Preview Timecode
Indicates the current timecode of the timecode source. The timecode
value of XX:XX:XX:XX is displayed if there is no input timecode.
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Setting Options
Control
Description and User Operation
Z
Clip Name Edit Control
Displays the clip’s name and location in the media storage system.
To rename the clip, click the Clip Name, then enter text. To change
the current bin, i.e. the target location for recording clips, refer to
“Setting Options” on page 255.
[
Eject Clip
Ejects the currently loaded clip.
\
Active/Preview Button
Toggle to specify active clip or preview clip.
]
Time Dome
This indicator displays record progress.The Time Dome indicates
one revolution every 10 seconds.
^
Transport Controls
Controls the currently loaded clip.
Rewind Stop
Prev
Fast Play
Frame Fwd
Next Record
Frame
_
Mark-in and Mark-out
Displays mark-in or mark-out points.
`
Length
Displays clip length
a
Local/Remote Control
Mode Toggle
Click to toggle between status mode and local control mode. In status
mode, only the Configure button is enabled. In local control mode,
controls are enabled and the channel can be controlled by the local
AMP application OR by a remote AMP application or device.
Setting Options
1. In the local control mode, select Options. The Options dialog box opens.
2. Specify the current working folder. This is the folder to which clips are recorded
and from which clips are loaded.
3. Select the Timecode mode and the E to E mode.
4. Click OK to save settings and close.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
255
Chapter 10
Controlling the Profile XP Remotely
Loading a clip
1. Open the Load dialog using one of the following:
• Select the Load button.
• Select the File menu, then choose Load.
The Load dialog box opens.
6. Enter a clip name or select a clip in the list.
7. Click OK. The clip is loaded.
Playing a clip
1. Click the Active/Preview button to put the Active button in front.
2. Load a clip.
3. Click the Play transport control button.
Recording a clip
1. Click the Record transport control button. A new clip with a default name is
created.
2. When the desired material has been recorded, click the Stop transport control
button.
If a previously recorded clip is loaded when record is clicked, it is ejected and a new clip
with a default name is created.
256
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
11
Setting up a Simple Network
This chapter describes how to set up a simple network of Profile XP systems. Procedures
are included for setting up the Windows NT network and both Profile video network
options.
Sections in the chapter include:
• About Profile Networking
• Setting up a simple Windows NT network
• Setting up a simple video network: Fibre Channel
• Setting up a simple video network: Ethernet
About Profile Networking
Profile XP network interfaces include a standard Ethernet interface and optional video
network interfaces which include a 1Gbs Fibre Channel interface and a 100BaseT
Ethernet interface. Both video network options require the Windows NT network
connection.
About Windows NT networking
All Profile XP systems include a 10/100BaseT Ethernet interface for Windows NT
networking. Connecting the Profile XP to a network not only gives you access to all the
standard Windows NT networking features, but also allows remote control and
monitoring of your Profile XP system using an NT Workstation running Profile
applications. The Windows NT Ethernet network connection is also required when using
either the Fibre Channel or Ethernet video network options. Refer to the procedures in
“Setting up a simple Windows NT network” on page 264, when you are ready to set up
the Windows NT network.
Profile XP
Ethernet
Profile XP
Profile XP
NT Workstation
running Profile
Remote Applications
0624-16
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
257
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
About the Fibre Channel video network option
The Fibre Channel video network actually relies on two separate networks: Fibre
Channel and Ethernet. The Fibre Channel network is part of the Real-Time Processor
subsystem which manages the flow of video data in and out of the system (refer to “High
level block diagram” on page 34 in Chapter 1, “Introducing the Profile XP Media
Platform”). The Fibre Channel network provides the high speed connection between
network devices.
The Ethernet network is part of the Windows NT computer system in the Profile XP and
is used for control and transport of data associated with the discovery and identification
of video clips within the system. This network can be either 10BaseT or 100BaseT
Ethernet. Both networks use TCP/IP network protocol.
Ethernet 10/100BaseT
(Control & clip database)
Profile XP
Fibre Channel 1Gbs
(High speed video transfers)
Profile XP
0624-14
258
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
About the Fibre Channel video network option
How’s it connected together?
How the network is physically connected together refers to what is called the network
topology or layout. The Ethernet and Fibre Channel network layouts can differ, so we’ll
talk about the Ethernet network first.
Ethernet network layout
You can connect your Profile XP systems together using an Ethernet hub or switch. An
Ethernet hub is used in most simple Ethernet networks. The Profile XP system provides
a 10/100BaseT Ethernet interface and uses a standard RJ-45 connector. Make sure the
hub or switch you are using provides RJ-45 connectors.
Ethernet Hub
or Switch
Fibre Channel
Switch
Profile1
Profile2
Profile3
0624-12
Fibre Channel network layout
Fibre Channel connections are provided by a Fibre Channel switch. Fibre Channel hubs
are not supported. A Fibre Channel switch provides a full 1Gbs connection between
devices on the network. Using a switch enables multicasting. Multicasting allows
transfers of the same file from one to multiple (max of 8) Profile XP systems.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
259
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
Choosing machine names and IP addresses for your Fibre Channel network
The default machine name for each Profile XP system is the unit serial number. You may
want to change the name to something more meaningful, such as Profile1 or Profile2.
The video network option also requires you to set up two IP addresses for each
Profile XP unit, one for the Ethernet interface and the other for the Fibre Channel
interface. A common mistake is to choose IP addresses for the Fibre Channel and
Ethernet interfaces using the same network ID. This is wrong; the IP addresses for each
network must be unique.
Here is an example of IP addresses for two Profile XP systems:
Computer Name: Profile1
Ethernet Address: 192.168.99.1
FC Address:
192.168.100.1
Computer Name: Profile2
Ethernet Address: 192.168.99.2
FC Address:
192.168.100.2
You can use the these addresses if you want, but if you are connecting the Ethernet
interface to an existing network, check with your system administrator for the correct
names and IP addresses to use.
Use the table below to enter information you’ll need when you configure your video
network.
Machine Name
Ethernet IP Address
Fibre Channel IP
Address
Refer to the procedures in “Setting up a simple video network: Fibre Channel” on page
268, when you to set up the Fibre Channel video network.
260
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
About the Ethernet video network option
About the Ethernet video network option
The video network option actually relies on two separate Ethernet networks: the
Windows NT Ethernet network interface which comes standard on all systems and the
optional Ethernet video network interface.
Ethernet 100BaseT
(Video transfers)
Ethernet 10/100BaseT
(Control & clip database)
Profile XP
Profile XP
0624-29
The Windows NT network is used for control and transport of data associated with the
discovery and identification of video clips on the network. This network can be either
10BaseT or 100BaseT. The Ethernet video network interface option is used to transfer
files over local area and wide area networks. Both networks use TCP/IP network
protocol.
After configuring TCP/IP settings for both networks, the hardware can be connected
using standard Ethernet hubs or switches. Both Ethernet network interfaces use standard
RJ-45 connectors.
Ethernet Hub
or Switch
Ethernet Hub
or Switch
Profile1
Profile2
Windows NT
Network
Profile3
Video Network
0624-13
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
261
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
Choosing machine names and IP addresses for your Ethernet video network
The default machine name for each Profile XP system is the unit serial number. You may
want to change the name to something more meaningful, such as Profile1 or Profile2.
The video network option also requires you to set up two IP addresses for each
Profile XP unit, one for the Windows NT Ethernet interface and the other for the
Ethernet video network interface. A common mistake is to choose IP addresses for the
Windows NT and video network interfaces using the same network ID. This is wrong;
the IP addresses for each network must be unique.
Here is an example of IP addresses for two Profile XP systems:
Computer Name:
Profile1
Windows NT Ethernet interface IP Address:
192.168.99.1
Video Network Ethernet interface IP Address:
192.168.101.1
Computer Name:
Profile2
Windows NT Ethernet interface IP Address:
192.168.99.2
Video Network Ethernet interface IP Address:
192.168.101.2
You can use the these addresses if you want, but if you are connecting either Ethernet
interface to an existing network, check with your system administrator for the correct
names and IP addresses to use.
Use the table below to enter information you’ll need when you configure your networks.
Machine Name
Windows NT Ethernet
Interface IP Address
Video Network Ethernet
Interface IP Address
Refer to the procedures in “Setting up a simple video network: Ethernet” on page 277,
when you to set up the Ethernet video network.
262
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Simple Networks
Simple Networks
Both the Windows NT network and the Profile video network can accommodate large
local area networks and wide area networks which can require advanced computer
systems expertise to design, install, and maintain. Setting up these kinds of networks is
beyond the scope of this chapter. However, in many applications a simple network is all
that’s needed. For example, you may want a video network connection between the main
and backup Profile XP systems, or perhaps you need a simple ethernet connection
between a Profile XP system and a PC to run Profile applications remotely. This chapter
was designed with these applications in mind.
Procedures in this chapter make these assumptions:
• For existing networks - If you are connecting to an existing local or wide area
network, you will consult with the network administrator to obtain the information
you need to set up each Profile XP on the network.
• For new networks - All network devices are connected to a hub or switch and are
running Windows NT Workstation. If you are installing a server, for example
Windows NT Server, you must consult the vendor documentation.
Whatever your networking need or level of expertise, Grass Valley can help you when
you are ready to expand your network. More information about networking can be
obtained from Grass Valley, your consultant, advisor, and commercially available
books.
Profile XP systems with both video network options installed
The Profile XP supports installation of both the Fibre Channel and Ethernet video
network options. This allows greater flexibility in how you move media within your
system. You may choose to use Fibre Channel connectivity for local high speed
transfers, while Ethernet provides transfer capability over commercially available
networks.
When both Fibre Channel and Ethernet video network connections exist between two
Profile XP systems, the system software will always use the Fibre Channel network to
perform the transfer request.
If you are setting up a Profile XP system with both network options installed, it is
recommended you install and test one network, then set up and test the other. Refer to
either of the following procedures when you are ready to get started.
• “Setting up a simple video network: Fibre Channel” on page 268
• “Setting up a simple video network: Ethernet” on page 277
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
263
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
Setting up a simple Windows NT network
The Windows NT operating system on all Profile XP systems comes pre-configured for
connection to Ethernet using TCP/IP protocol on either 10BaseT or 100BaseT networks.
The Profile XP Ethernet adapter is set up to auto-sense the correct network speed, so all
you have to do is perform the following steps on each Profile XP system you’ll be
connecting to the network.
Steps to perform:
• Set machine name and IP address on each Profile XP system
• Power-off and connect proper cabling
• Power-on the hub or switch and configure if necessary
• Power-on and test each Profile XP system on the network
NOTE: If you are integrating your Profile XP system into an existing local or wide
area network, you may require more steps than those listed here. You must consult
with the network administrator to obtain the information you need to configure the
Profile XP for an existing network.
Set machine name and IP address on each Profile XP system
Use these steps to set the machine name and IP address on each Profile XP system.
1. Set up the machine name as follows:
a. Log on as Administrator (see “Logging on Windows NT” on page 44).
b. Open the Control Panel by clicking Start | Settings | Control Panel.
c. Double-click Network.
d. On the Identification tab click the Change button.
e. In the Computer Name box enter a name for the Profile XP system. The default
name for each Profile XP system is the unit serial number. You may want to use
something more meaningful, such as Profile1 or Profile2.
f. Click OK to close Computer Name dialog box.
264
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Set machine name and IP address on each Profile XP system
7. Set up the IP address as follows:
a. In the Network dialog box click the Protocols tab.
b. Highlight TCP/IP Protocol and then click Properties.
c. Click the IP Address tab, then click Specify IP Address.
d. Enter an IP address for the Profile XP.
e. If you are not connecting to an existing network, you can choose any IP address
you want. Here are some examples of IP addresses and names you could use:
Computer Name: Profile1
Ethernet Address: 192.168.99.1
Computer Name: Profile2
Ethernet Address: 192.168.99.2
f. Verify the Subnet Mask is set to 255.255.255.0.
g. Click OK to close the TCP/IP Properties dialog box, then click OK to close the
Network dialog box.
h. When asked to reboot click NO, then close the Control Panel.
i. Shutdown Windows NT, then power-off the Profile XP when the message is
displayed to do so.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
265
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
Power-off and connect proper cabling
The Ethernet connector for Windows NT networking is an RJ-45 connector located on
the rear panel as shown. Ethernet cables are provided with your Profile XP system. If
these cables are not used, be sure to refer to Appendix B, “Connector Pin-outs” for
cabling specifications and pinouts.
Profile XP Media Platform
From Ethernet
network hub or
switch.
0624-27
You can connect your Profile XP systems together using an Ethernet hub or switch. An
Ethernet hub is used in most simple Ethernet networks.
Ethernet Hub
or Switch
Profile1
Profile2
Windows NT
Network
Profile3
0624-30
266
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Power-on the hub or switch and configure if necessary
Power-on the hub or switch and configure if necessary
Refer to the your device’s vendor documentation to power-on and configure as required.
Power-on and test each Profile XP system on the network
Use Network Neighborhood to test network configuration and connectivity.
To test the network:
1. Power-on two Profile XP systems.
2. Perform the following test on each Profile XP system:
a. On the desktop, click Network Neighborhood.
b. Verify that all systems on the network are listed. If the Workgroup icon appears,
you may have to double-click the Workgroup icon.
3. Power-on the next Profile XP system and wait for it to initialize, then repeat step
2. Continue adding one system at a time until all Profile XP systems have been
tested. You may have to refresh the Network Neighborhood window to see new
systems displayed.
NOTE: If you have a problem, refer to Chapter 12, “Solving Common Setup
Problems”, on page 287.
Now that you have tested the network connections for all Profile XP systems, you are
ready to use the Ethernet network. If you are setting up an optional video network, return
to one of the following procedures:
“Setting up a simple video network: Fibre Channel” on page 268
“Setting up a simple video network: Ethernet” on page 277
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
267
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
Setting up a simple video network: Fibre Channel
The Fibre Channel video network option provides a 1Gbs Fibre Channel interface for
high speed transfer of video clips among devices connected to the network. Network
devices can include Profiles or Profile XP systems, near-on-line video servers, and video
archive systems to name a few. Use the procedures in this section to set up your
Profile XP systems on a Fibre Channel video network.
Here is a list of the steps you will perform:
• Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network
• Configure Fibre Channel network settings on each Profile XP
• Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP
• Power-down and connect proper Fibre Channel cabling
• Power-on the switch and configure if necessary
• Test the Fibre Channel network using Media Manager
NOTE: To communicate across the network, all Fibre Channel machines should
have Profile system software version 2.5 installed.
Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network
When setting up the Fibre Channel network, you must first set up the Windows NT
Ethernet network. Use the procedure found on page 264, Setting up a simple Windows
NT network, then continue with Configure Fibre Channel network settings on each
Profile XP on page 269.
268
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Configure Fibre Channel network settings on each Profile XP
Configure Fibre Channel network settings on each Profile XP
After setting up the Windows NT network, you must configure the IP address and subnet
mask for the Fibre Channel interface and choose the network options you want to use.
To configure the Fibre Channel network settings:
1. Open Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by choosing Start |
Programs | Profile Applications | Configuration Manager.
2. Choose Network in the Configuration Manager window. The Network dialog box
appears.
3. Enter the IP address and Subnet mask for the Fibre Channel interface.
NOTE: Be sure to read all the information about choosing IP addresses for the
Fibre Channel video network option on page 260, Choosing machine names and IP
addresses for your Fibre Channel network.
4. Enter the IP address for the system gateway if used.
5. Select the error detection options you want to use. Enabling extra error detection
insures data transfer without corruption. Disabling extra error detection speeds up
network transfers.
6. Click Finish to save your settings.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
269
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP
NOTE: Perform this step if you disabled Autohost file administration earlier.
The hosts file is used by the video network to determine the Ethernet and Fibre Channel
IP address of devices on the network when only a the device name is given. The steps
that follow describe how to edit the hosts file located at
c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts. If you include the names and addresses of all the
devices on the network, then you can copy the same file onto all the other Profile XP
systems instead of editing the hosts file on each Profile XP system.
NOTE: An alternative to manually editing the hosts file is to use the Autohosts file
administration feature discussed earlier.
To edit the hosts file manually:
1. Open the following file using Notepad or some other text editing application.
c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts
2. The text format is simple. First type the Ethernet IP address, then use the TAB key
or Space bar to insert a few spaces. Now type the machine name, such as Profile1.
On the next line, type the IP address of the Fibre Channel interface of the same
Profile XP followed by the machine name again, only this time, add the characters
_fc0.
Here is an example:
192.168.99.1
192.168.100.1
192.168.99.2
192.168.100.2
270
Profile XP System Guide
Profile1
Profile1_fc0
Profile2
Profile2_fc0
13 May 2005
Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP
The following is shows the content of the default Windows NT hosts file with the
new lines added. All lines beginning with a # are comments and can be ignored or
deleted.
# Copyright (c) 1993-1995 Microsoft Corp.
#
# This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP/IP for Windows NT.
#
# This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names. Each
# entry should be kept on an individual line. The IP address should
# be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name.
# The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one
# space.
#
# Additionally, comments (such as these) may be inserted on individual
# lines or following the machine name denoted by a '#' symbol.
#
# For example:
#
#
102.54.94.97 rhino.acme.com
# source server
#
38.25.63.10 x.acme.com
# x client host
127.0.0.1
192.168.99.1
192.168.100.1
192.168.99.2
192.168.100.2
localhost
Profile1
Profile1_fc0
Profile2
Profile_fc0
3. Save the file and exit the text editor.
4. Reboot your Profile XP unit.
5. Copy the new hosts file onto all the other machine to save you editing it again.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
271
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
Power-down and connect proper Fibre Channel cabling
The Fibre Channel network interface uses a fiber optical connector located on the rear
panel as shown. Fiber optic cables are provided with your Profile XP system. If these
cables are not used, be sure to refer to Appendix B, “Connector Pin-outs”, for cabling
specifications.
Connect the fiber optic cable between the Fibre Channel switch and the Profile XP
network connectors as shown.
NOTE: Do not force the fiber optic plug into the Fibre Channel board connector as
you may damage the connector, the plug, or both. Make certain the fiber surface is
clean, free of dust or debris, before inserting the connector into the Fibre Channel
board connector.
Profile XP Media Platform
0624-28
From Fibre
Channel network
hub or switch.
You can connect your Profile XP systems together using a Fibre Channel switch.
272
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Power-on the switch and configure if necessary
Ethernet Hub
or Switch
Fibre Channel
Switch
Profile1
Profile2
Profile3
0624-12
Power-on the switch and configure if necessary
Refer to the your device’s vendor documentation to power-on and configure as required.
Test the Fibre Channel network using Media Manager
Use this procedure to perform a quick test of your video network setup with Media
Manager. Media Manager allows you to have access to media stored anywhere on your
network and provides tools for managing that media—such as explore, cut, copy, paste,
delete and transfer. You can manage media stored locally on the disk array attached to
the Profile XP system or on any Profile XP system connected to the network. You can
also transfer media stored on any Profile XP system on your video network via the video
network connection. For detailed information on using all the features of Media
Manager, refer to the Profile XP User Manual.
This procedure tests the Fibre Channel network starting with only two Profile XP
systems, then continues by adding one Profile XP system at a time until all systems are
on and tested.
NOTE: If you encounter a problem during any portion of this test procedure, refer
to Chapter 12, “Solving Common Setup Problems”, on page 287.
To test the Fibre Channel video network:
1. Power-on two Profile XP systems.
2. Perform the following test on each Profile XP system:
a. Double-click on the Port Server icon. This starts the Fibre Channel
communication tool. It must always be running on any machine where you are
using Fibre Channel. If you want, you can place Port Server in StartUp folder
and set it to run minimized. Make sure it’s running on the other Profile machine,
too.
b. Start Media Manager by double-clicking the shortcut on the desktop or by
choosing Start | Programs | Profile Applications | Media Manager. The Media
Manager window appears.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
273
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
NOTE: You will not automatically see the other machine on the network. For
example, if you are running Media Manager on Profile1 you will only see Profile1.
c. Choose File | Add/Remove Machine. The Add/Remove Machine dialog box
appears. The Local label follows the name of the current machine.
d. Click Add. The Add Network Host dialog box appears.
274
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Test the Fibre Channel network using Media Manager
e. Enter the name of the other machine in the New Host Name box (Profile2 for
example), then click OK. The new host name is added to the network host list as
shown.
f. Click OK to close the Add/Remove Machine window. The Connection Status
message box appears showing the progress of new connection, then the Media
Manager window reappears including the machine name just added.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
275
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
clip icon
default bin
volume icon
contents pane
7. Power-on the next Profile XP system and wait for it to initialize, then repeat step
2. Continue adding one system at a time until all Profile XP systems have been
added to Media Manager.
8. Use the following steps to transfer a clip over the network.
a. Double click on the icon of another machine on the network.
b. Double click on the volume icon
(default name is “Ext”) in the same
machine. A default bin should be displayed.
c. Double click on the icon of the local machine on the network and then the
volume icon
. If there are no clips on any machines, you can open VdrPanel
and create some. (See Profile XP User Manual for VdrPanel information.)
d. Click and drag a clip to a bin on another machine.Dragging a clip to a different
machine always results in a copy—the original clip is not deleted.
e. Repeat steps a through d until you have tested the network to your satisfaction.
NOTE: You can select the transfer monitor icon on the toolbar to open the
transfer monitor and watch the progress of the network transfer.
Now that you have tested the network connections for all Profile XP systems, you
are ready to use the video network.
276
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Setting up a simple video network: Ethernet
Setting up a simple video network: Ethernet
The Ethernet video network option provides a 10/100BaseT Ethernet interface for
transfer of video clips among devices connected to the network. Network devices can
include other Profile XP systems, near-on-line video servers, and video archive systems
to name a few. Use the procedures in this section to set up your Profile XP systems on a
Ethernet video network.
Here is a list of the steps you will perform:
• Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network
• Configure the video network on each Profile XP: Ethernet
• Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP
• Power-off and connect proper Ethernet cabling
• Power-on the hub or switch and configure if necessary
• Test the Ethernet video network using Media Manager
Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network
When installing the Ethernet video network option, you must first set up the Windows
NT Ethernet network. Use the procedure found on page 264, Setting up a simple
Windows NT network, then return to this page and continue with Configure the video
network on each Profile XP: Ethernet.
Configure the video network on each Profile XP: Ethernet
After setting up the Windows NT network interface, you must configure the IP address
and subnet mask for the video network Ethernet interface and choose the network
options you want to use.
To configure the video network Ethernet settings:
1. Open Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by choosing Start |
Programs | Profile Applications | Configuration Manager.
2. Choose Network in the Configuration Manager window. The Network
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
277
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
3. Enter the IP address and Subnet mask for the video network Ethernet interface.
NOTE: Be sure to read all the information about choosing IP addresses for the
Fibre Channel video network option on page 262, Choosing machine names and IP
addresses for your Ethernet video network.
4. Enter the IP address for the gateway if used.
5. Select the error detection options you want to use. Enabling extra error detection
insures data transfer without corruption. Disabling extra error detection speeds up
network transfers.
6. Click Finish to save your settings.
278
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP
Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP
NOTE: Perform this step if you disabled Autohost file administration earlier.
The hosts file is used by the video network to determine the IP address of devices on the
network when only a the device name is given. The steps that follow describe how to edit
the hosts file located at c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts. If you include the names
and addresses of all the devices on the network, then you can copy the same file onto all
the other Profile XP systems instead of editing the hosts file on each Profile XP system.
NOTE: An alternative to manually editing the hosts file is to use the Autohosts file
administration feature discussed earlier.
To update your hosts file manually:
1. Open the following file using Notepad or some other text editing application.
c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts
2. The text format is simple. First type the Ethernet IP address, then use the TAB key
or Space bar to insert a few spaces. Now type the machine name, such as Profile1.
On the next line, type the IP address of the video network Ethernet interface of the
same Profile XP followed by the machine name again, only this time, add the
characters _le0.
Here is an example:
192.168.99.1
192.168.101.1
192.168.99.2
192.168.101.2
13 May 2005
Profile1
Profile1_le0
Profile2
Profile2_le0
Profile XP System Guide
279
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
The following shows the content of the default Windows NT hosts file with the
new lines added. All lines beginning with a # are comments and can be ignored or
deleted.
# Copyright (c) 1993-1995 Microsoft Corp.
#
# This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP/IP for Windows NT.
#
# This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names. Each
# entry should be kept on an individual line. The IP address should
# be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name.
# The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one
# space.
#
# Additionally, comments (such as these) may be inserted on individual
# lines or following the machine name denoted by a '#' symbol.
#
# For example:
#
#
102.54.94.97 rhino.acme.com
# source server
#
38.25.63.10 x.acme.com
# x client host
127.0.0.1
192.168.99.1
192.168.101.1
192.168.99.2
192.168.101.2
localhost
Profile1
Profile1_le0
Profile2
Profile2_le0
3. Save the file and exit the text editor.
4. Reboot your Profile XP unit.
5. Copy the new hosts file onto all the other machine to save you editing it again.
280
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Power-off and connect proper Ethernet cabling
Power-off and connect proper Ethernet cabling
The Ethernet interface connector for the video network is located on the rear panel as
shown. The video network option provides a standard RJ-45 connector.
Ethernet cables were provided with your Profile XP system. If these cables are not used,
be sure to refer to Appendix B, “Connector Pin-outs” for cabling specifications and
pinouts.
Profile XP Media Platform
0624-37
From Ethernet
network hub or
switch.
You can connect your Profile XP systems together using an Ethernet hub or switch. An
Ethernet hub is used in most simple Ethernet networks. A switch is required for
multicasting.
Ethernet Hub
or Switch
Ethernet Hub
or Switch
Profile1
Profile2
Windows NT
Network
Profile3
Video Network
0624-13
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
281
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
Power-on the hub or switch and configure if necessary
Refer to the your device’s vendor documentation to power-on and configure as required.
Test the Ethernet video network using Media Manager
Use this procedure to perform a quick test of your video network setup with Media
Manager. Media Manager allows you to have access to media stored anywhere on your
network and provides tools for managing that media—such as explore, cut, copy, paste,
delete and transfer. You can manage media stored locally on the disk array attached to
the Profile XP system or on any Profile XP system connected to the network. You can
also transfer media stored on any Profile XP system on your video network via the video
network connection. For detailed information on using all the features of Media
Manager, refer to the Profile XP User Manual.
This procedure tests the video network starting with only two Profile XP systems, then
continues by adding one Profile XP system at a time until all systems are on and tested.
NOTE: If you encounter a problem during any portion of this test procedure, refer
to Chapter 12, “Solving Common Setup Problems”, on page 287.
To test the video network:
1. Power-on two Profile XP systems.
2. Perform the following test on each Profile XP system:
a. Double-click on the Port Server icon. This starts the video network
communication tool. It must always be running on any machine where you are
using video network. If you want, you can place Port Server in StartUp folder
and set it to run minimized. Make sure it’s running on the other Profile machine,
too.
282
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Test the Ethernet video network using Media Manager
b. Start Media Manager by double-clicking the shortcut on the desktop or by
choosing Start | Programs | Profile Applications | Media Manager. The Media
Manager window appears.
NOTE: You will not automatically see the other machine on the network. For
example, if you are running Media Manager on Profile1 you will only see Profile1.
c. Choose File | Add/Remove Machine. The Add/Remove Machine dialog box
appears. The Local label follows the name of the current machine.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
283
Chapter 11
Setting up a Simple Network
d. Click Add. The Add Network Host dialog box appears.
e. Enter the name of the other machine in the New Host Name box (Profile2 for
example), then click OK. The new host name is added to the network host list as
shown.
f. Click OK to close the Add/Remove Machine window. The Connection Status
message box appears showing the progress of new connection, then the Media
Manager window reappears including the machine name just added.
284
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Test the Ethernet video network using Media Manager
clip icon
default bin
volume icon
contents pane
7. Power-on the next Profile XP system and wait for it to initialize, then repeat step
2. Continue adding one system at a time until all Profile XP systems have been
added to Media Manager.
8. Use the following steps to transfer a clip over the network.
a. Double click on the icon of another machine on the network.
b. Double click on the volume icon
(default name is “Ext”) in the same
machine. A default bin should be displayed.
c. Double click on the icon of the local machine on the network and then the
volume icon
. If there are no clips on any machines, you can open VdrPanel
and create some. (See Profile XP User Manual for VdrPanel information.)
d. Click and drag a clip to a bin on another machine.Dragging a clip to a different
machine always results in a copy—the original clip is not deleted.
e. Repeat steps a through d until you have tested the network to your satisfaction.
NOTE: You can select the transfer monitor icon on the toolbar to open the
transfer monitor and watch the progress of the network transfer.
Now that you have tested the network connections for all Profile XP systems, you
are ready to use the video network.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
285
Chapter 11
286
Setting up a Simple Network
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Chapter
12
Solving Common Setup Problems
This chapter provides help for solving some common setup problems that occur because
Profile XP system features or signal requirements are not well understood. This chapter
is organized by problem area with troubleshooting tables that provide symptom,
probable cause, and corrective action.
If you do not solve your system problem using the information in this chapter, refer to
the Profile XP Service Manual for more in-depth troubleshooting information. If all else
fails, contact Grass Valley Support. Grass Valley Product Support contact information
is located on page 13 of this manual.
Summary of setup problems
If you experience a problem setting up the Profile XP system, first check all external
connections to make sure they are properly made, then refer to the list of problem areas
in the following table. Begin on the page indicated to find help in solving your setup
problem.
13 May 2005
Problem Area
Begin on Page
Common record/play problems
287-288
Problems with video
287-289
Problems with audio
287-290
Problems with timecode
287-292
Storage system problems
287-294
Problems using Configuration Manager
287-295
Channel control problems
287-296
Common Ethernet network problems
287-297
Common Fibre Channel video network
problems
287-298
Common Ethernet video network problems
287-303
Profile XP System Guide
287
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
Common record/play problems
This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common record/play
problems. Search the table for the problem you are experiencing, then try the corrective
action. Some problems have more than one corrective action.
288
Problem
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
Application fails to select a
channel or channels when it is
started.
Resource conflict because a
resource needed by the channel
is already in use.
Check for resources that may be
assigned to more than one
channel and correct the problem
Refer to “Using the Warning
symbol to find shared
resources” on page 124. Also,
make sure the Channel
Configuration dialog box is
closed before running the
application or selecting
channels.
The recorded clip contains
colorbar.
The colorbar generator is
selected as the channel input.
Select the desired video input as
the channel source. Refer to
“Selecting video quality and
crosspoints” on page 130
The recorded clip contains black
or freeze frame.
Loss of input signal.
Verify that you have a valid
input signal. Refer to “Viewing
video input status” on page 168.
The channel output is black in
E to E, but playback is fine.
Loss of input signal.
Verify that you have a valid
input signal. Refer to “Viewing
video input status” on page 168.
Channel output is always black.
The output you’re monitoring is
not assigned to the channel.
Determine the video output
assigned to the channel by
referring to“Selecting video
quality and crosspoints” on page
130, then verify cable
connections.
Freeze frames or black frames
during playback.
The number of record and play,
channels operating
simultaneously exceeds the
system storage bandwidth.
Reduce the number of channels
operating at the same time, or
select a lower video quality
preset for the record. Refer to
“Guidelines for selecting Video
Quality Presets” on page 156.
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Problems with video
Problems with video
This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common video problems.
Search the table for the problem you are experiencing, then try the corrective action.
Some problems have more than one corrective action.
13 May 2005
Problem
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
Video output distortion in
playback and E to E.
Wrong video standard.
Verify system video standard is
configured correctly. Refer to
“Changing the system video
standard” on page 151.
Horizontal aberrations
free-running through the picture
in Record mode (or E to E).
Sometimes intermittent
depending on the input signal
selected.
Input frame sync set to “pass”
when incoming signal is
asynchronous.
Set frame sync to “Auto-time”.
Refer to “Recording
synchronous and asynchronous
feeds” on page 150.
Continuous horizontal picture
shift in Record mode (or E to E).
Sometimes intermittent
depending on the input signal
selected.
Input frame sync set to “pass”
when incoming signal is
asynchronous.
Set frame sync to “Auto-time”.
Refer to “Recording
synchronous and asynchronous
feeds” on page 150.
Playout timing is 16 lines
delayed
Playout timing set to E to E
timed output.
Change playout timing to
“Zero-Timed” output. Refer to
“Adjusting playout timing to
match zero time” on page 144.
Vertical shift when switching
between video input and
playout.
Playout timing set to
Zero-Timed output.
Change playout timing to
“E to E-Timed” output. Refer to
“Adjusting playout timing to
match E to E timing” on page
146
Compression artifacts are
present in the output.
Video quality setting is too low
for your program material.
Select higher video quality
preset (refer to “Guidelines for
selecting Video Quality Presets”
on page 156, or define your own
video quality preset. Refer to
“Defining and selecting a
custom video quality preset” on
page 162.
Profile XP System Guide
289
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
Problems with audio
This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common audio problems.
Search the table for the problem you are experiencing, then try the corrective action.
Some problems have more than one corrective action.
290
Problem
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
AES/EBU or analog audio:
No audio I/O or the audio does
not match the video.
You are using audio I/O
connectors for audio channels
not assigned to the video
channel you are using.
Verify the audio channel pair(s)
assigned to the channel you’re
using. Refer to“Selecting audio
channels for an audio track” on
page 196.
AES/EBU or analog audio:
No audio I/O.
The incorrect audio input format
is selected for the audio
channels you are using.
Determine the audio channels
assigned the channel by
referring to “Selecting audio
channels for an audio track” on
page 196, then verify that the
correct audio input format is
selected. Refer to “Changing the
audio I/O format” on page 197.
Analog audio:
Audio is present on audio level
meters in applications, but there
is no audio output signal.
Analog audio out is muted.
Un-mute the audio output. Refer
to “Muting analog audio
outputs” on page 207.
Analog audio:
Both E to E and playback audio
output are distorted.
Audio input signal clipping
caused by excessive audio input
level or wrong input impedance
setting. PAC216 input
impedance is set to Hi-Z by
default.
Check for input audio clipping,
and reduce the input audio level
using the input gain adjustment.
Refer to “Adjusting analog
audio input level” on page 205.
Change input impedance to 600
ohms if required in your system.
Analog audio:
Audio level is too low.
Analog input and output level
can be adjusted in the Profile XP
system user interface.
Adjust the input or output audio
level as required. Refer to
“Adjusting analog audio input
level” on page 205 or
“Adjusting analog audio output
level” on page 206
Embedded audio:
No audio input.
Wrong video source selected.
Select the correct video input.
Refer to “Select audio input
format” on page 197.
Embedded audio:
No audio input.
Wrong audio group or channel
pair selected.
Determine which audio group is
being used in the video input
signal by using “Viewing video
input status” on page 168, then
refer to “Select audio input
format” on page 197.
Embedded audio:
No audio output.
Wrong video output selected.
Select the correct video output.
Refer to “Select audio output
format” on page 199.
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Problems with audio
13 May 2005
Problem
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
Embedded audio:
No audio output.
Incorrect audio group or channel
pair selected for your system.
Verify which embedded audio
group and channel pair are used
in your system, then refer to
“Select audio output format” on
page 199.
Audio level meters do not
display the correct reference
level used in my system.
Incorrect reference level
Refer to “Selecting audio
reference level” on page 209.
Distorted audio or no audio
Wrong incoming digital audio
coding format selected.
Verify the input audio format is
set correctly, refer to “Selecting
incoming digital audio coding
format” on page 202.
Profile XP System Guide
291
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
Problems with timecode
This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common timecode
problems. Search the table for the problem you are experiencing, then try the corrective
action. Some problems have more than one corrective action.
VITC Record
292
Problem
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
VITC:
Incorrect recorded timecode.
VITC reader is set to automatic
and there are two sets of VITC
in the VBI.
Use manual VITC detection and
specify lines where VITC
should be read. Refer to
“Recording VITC” on page 217.
VITC:
Incorrect or no recorded
timecode.
The VITC reader is set to
manual and there are two sets of
VITC in the VBI and the wrong
VITC lines may be specified.
Verify location of VITC signals
and set up manual VITC
detection accordingly. Refer to
“Recording VITC” on page 217.
VITC:
Can’t read or record VITC.
VITC detection is set to manual
and the wrong VITC lines are
specified
Set VITC detect to Automatic or
verify location of VITC signals
and set up manual VITC
detection accordingly. Refer to
“Recording VITC” on page 217.
VITC:
The VITC output I want to use is
not listed in the Timecode
Output list.
You have not assigned the
corresponding video output to
the channel.
Assign the video output you
want to use to the channel. Refer
to “Selecting the video I/Os used
by a channel” on page 155
VITC:
Incorrect VITC timecode on the
video output.
There may be two sets of VITC
on the video output and the
external reader is reading the
wrong timecode signal. Two
VITC signals can occur when
there is VITC on the video input
or playback signal and at the
same time, the video output is
generating VITC.
Erase the VITC signal on the
video output (refer to “Erasing
video input VBI information”
on page 171) or turn off the
VITC generator on the output
(refer to “Setting up the VITC
generator on a video output” on
page 225 and choose “Do not
generate VITC”).
VITC:
Two sets of VITC signals are
present on the output.
There may be two sets of VITC
because there is VITC on the
video input or playback signal
and also the video output is
generating VITC.
Erase the VITC signal on the
video output (refer to “Deleting
unwanted VITC and other VBI
signals” on page 226) or turn off
the VITC generator on the
output (refer to “Setting up the
VITC generator on a video
output” on page 225 and choose
“Do not generate VITC”).
Recorded timecode reads
xx.xx.xx.xx.
No timecode source for the
channel.
Select a timecode source. Refer
to “Selecting timecode I/O for
each timecode track” on page
140. This is normal in Profile
Applications when there is no
clip cued.
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
VITC Record
13 May 2005
Problem
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
LTC:
No time code or incorrect time
code.
The incorrect LTC input is
assigned to the channel you’re
using.
Determine the LTC input
assigned to the channel by
referring to“Recording or
generating LTC” on page 228,
then modify if needed.
LTC:
No time code or incorrect time
code.
The LTC output you’re
monitoring is not assigned to the
channel.
Determine the LTC output
assigned to the channel by
referring to“Recording or
generating LTC” on page 228,
then verify cable connections.
Timecode Burn-in
Video Monitor timecode burn-in
doesn’t change.
The Video Monitor output is not
selected as the timecode output
for the channel.
Make sure the video monitor
you are connected to is selected
as a timecode output for the
channel. Refer to “Select a
timecode source for timecode
burn-in” on page 229.
Profile XP System Guide
293
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
Storage system problems
IMPORTANT: If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN, refer to
the Open SAN Instruction Manual for information about troubleshooting storage
system problems.
This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common storage system
problems. Search the table for the problem you are experiencing, then try the corrective
action. Some problems have more than one corrective action.
294
Problem
Possible Causes
Corrective Action
No file system found message
displayed at first time power-up
of the Profile XP system.
No video file system.
If this is a first time start-up for
the system, you must create a
video file system. Create a video
file system on the storage disks.
Refer to “Working with Profile
XP storage systems” in the
Profile XP System Guide.
No file system found message
after a video file system has
been created in the past.
All RAID storage chassis are not
powered on and initialized
before the Profile XP system is
powered on.
One or more of the RAID
chassis or expansion chassis is
not powered on and fully
initialized. Refer to the Profile
XP Installation Guide for your
system. If this does not help, you
may have a hardware problem.
Refer to your RAID storage
Instruction Manual. Do not
create a new file system until
you have identified the problem.
Making a new file system
destroys all existing media.
Cannot “see” the disk system in
disk utility.
Interface problem.
Check all cabling and that all
systems are fully initialized.
Refer to your RAID storage
Instruction Manual.
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Problems using Configuration Manager
Problems using Configuration Manager
This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common problems when
using Configuration Manager or the remote version of Configuration Manager included
in NetCentral XP Enterprise. Search the table for the problem you are experiencing, then
try the corrective action. Some problems have more than one corrective action.
13 May 2005
Problem
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
Configuration Manager does not
display the effect of your
crosspoint selections as you
make them.
Another application is using the
channel or a channel which uses
one or more of the same
resources.
Terminate the use of the channel
by the application.
After using import or export the
two Profile XP systems do not
have the same configuration.
There may be hardware
differences between the
Profile XP systems which
include circuit board locations
in the motherboard.
Compare the hardware
configurations of the two
systems. Refer to “Viewing
board location information” on
page 56.
When attempting to connect to a
remote system, the remote
Profile XP system does not
appear in the “Remote Host
List”.
No network connection.
Refer to “Common Ethernet
network problems” on page 297.
Cannot connect to a remote
machine after selecting it in the
“Remote Host List”.
PortServer not running on the
remote machine.
Start PortServer on remote
Profile XP system. Refer to
“Running PortServer to enable
remote operation” on page 251.
A message appears that states
that Configuration Manager is
already running.
Configuration Manager already
running or some one is running
Configuration Manager
remotely.
Use the Configuration Manager
already running or resolve the
conflict with the remote user.
Can’t start Configuration
Manager locally.
Configuration Manager is
already running or someone is
connected remotely.
Use the session already running
or terminate the remote session.
Profile XP System Guide
295
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
Channel control problems
This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common control problems.
Search the table for the problem you are experiencing, then try the corrective action.
Some problems have more than one corrective action.
Problem
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
VdrPanel RS-422 Control:
Incorrect protocol selected
Refer to “Setting up RS-422
remote control in VdrPanel” on
page 246.
VdrPanel RS-422 Control:
The Profile XP system fails to
respond.
Controller connected to the
wrong RS-422 port.
Check for proper connection.
Prolink:
Cannot open channel.
Channel names do not match
those expected by the controller.
Define new channels or rename
existing ones Refer to“Adding
and configuring a new channel”
on page 126 or “Entering
channel name and description”
on page 126.
Prolink:
Cannot open channel.
Controller connected to the
wrong RS-422 port.
Check the title bar of the Prolink
window and verify the RS-422
cable is connected to the correct
physical port (P1-P8).
Ethernet:
Cannot connect to a remote
machine.
PortServer is not running on
remote machine.
Start PortServer on remote
machine. Refer to “Running
PortServer to enable remote
operation” on page 251.
Ethernet:
When running an application
remotely, you cannot find the
Profile XP system listed in the
Remote Host List.
The Profile XP system has a
problem with the Ethernet
connection.
Refer to “Common Ethernet
network problems” on page 297.
The Profile XP system fails to
respond.
296
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Common Ethernet network problems
Common Ethernet network problems
This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common Ethernet network
problems. Search the table for the problem you are experiencing, then try the corrective
action. Some problems have more than one corrective action.
13 May 2005
Problem
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
Windows NT reports there is an
IP address conflict.
Two or more Profile XP systems
have the same Ethernet IP
address.
Refer to the procedure “Set
machine name and IP address on
each Profile XP system” on
page 264
Only the local Profile XP
system is listed in Network
Neighborhood.
Missing network connection.
Check that the port link
indicator is lit on the hub or
switch the Profile XP Ethernet
cable is connected to. If not,
make sure the network cable is
properly connected, then refer to
the Profile XP Service
Manual for further corrective
action.
No Profile XP systems are listed
in the network neighborhood.
Not even the local Profile XP
system.
Some component of Windows
NT Networking improperly
installed.
Refer to the Profile XP
Service Manual for help in
Profile XP systems do not
immediately appear in Network
Neighborhood, but are
eventually displayed.
This is the normal operation of
Network Neighborhood.The
same applies when systems are
switched off. It may be several
minutes before refreshing the
display removes the system
from the list.
NA
solving the problem.
Profile XP System Guide
297
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
Common Fibre Channel video network problems
This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common Fibre Channel
video network problems. Search the table for the problem you are experiencing, then try
the corrective action. Some problems have more than one corrective action.
298
Problem
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
Can’t transfer files in Media
Manager.
There may be an incorrect Fibre
Channel name entry in the
HOSTS file on the Profile XP
system.
Verify all Ethernet and Fibre Channel
entries in the HOSTS all systems.
Make sure Fibre Channel names use
_fc0, that is, zero and not the letter O.
Refer to “Manually Edit the hosts file
on each Profile XP” on page 270.
Can’t transfer files in Media
Manager.
No Fibre Channel connectivity.
Refer to “Testing the Fibre Channel
Video network” on page 299.
In Media Manager, files
transfer only one direction.
There may be an incorrect entry
in the HOSTS file on the
Profile XP systems.
Verify all Ethernet and Fibre Channel
entries in the HOSTS file on both
systems, refer to “Manually Edit the
hosts file on each Profile XP” on page
270.
Media Manager can’t find a
Profile XP when you try to
add it to the network hosts list.
PortServer is not running on the
remote Profile XP system.
Start PortServer on the remote system,
refer to “Running PortServer to
enable remote operation” on page
251.
Media Manager can’t find the
Profile XP when you try to
add it to the network hosts list.
Unable to resolve Ethernet
name. There may be an incorrect
Ethernet name entry in the
HOSTS file.
Verify all Ethernet and Fibre Channel
entries in the HOSTS file on both
systems, refer to “Manually Edit the
hosts file on each Profile XP” on page
270
Media Manager can’t find a
Profile XP when you try to
add it to the network hosts list.
No Ethernet connectivity.
Refer to “Testing the Fibre Channel
Video network” on page 299.
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Testing the Fibre Channel Video network
Testing the Fibre Channel Video network
Use this procedure to test your video network setup. Tests are included for the Ethernet
and Fibre Channel networks.
Testing the Ethernet name resolution and connectivity
The Fibre Channel video network relies on Ethernet connectivity and name
resolution.This procedure uses the ping command which requests a response from the
named Profile XP system. If the remote system does not respond, you’ll try ping using
the IP address of the remote system. If the system responds, you have a name resolution
problem. If there is no response, refer to the Profile XP Service Manual for help with
solving problems with the Ethernet adapter or cabling.
To test the Ethernet network:
1. Open the Windows NT command prompt by selecting Start | Programs | Command
Prompt.
2. Type ping, then the Ethernet name of one of the Profile XP systems on the network,
then press Enter. For Example:
ping Profile1
If this command returns:
Pinging Profile1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
You have successfully resolved the name Profile1 and you have Ethernet network
connectivity.
If, however, the ping command returns:
Pinging Profile1 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
There is a connectivity problem or the Ethernet IP address could not resolve
properly. Continue with step 3.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
299
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
3. Type ping, then, this time, use the IP address of one of the Profile XP systems on
the network, then press Enter. For Example:
ping 192.168.99.100
If this command returns:
Pinging 192.168.99.100 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
You have connectivity to the network, so there must be a name resolution problem
for the IP address. You need to re-check your HOSTS file for accuracy. Refer to
“Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP” on page 270.
NOTE: You may want to re-boot to ensure that any changes have
taken effect.
If, however, the ping command returns:
Pinging 192.168.99.100 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
One or both of the Profile XP systems appears to have a network connectivity
problem. Re-check the cabling and try again. If this does not solve the problem,
refer to the Profile XP Service Manual for more help with solving Ethernet network
problems.
4. Repeat step 2 on all Profile XP systems on the network, then proceed with “Testing
Fibre Channel name resolution and connectivity” on page 301.
300
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Testing the Fibre Channel Video network
Testing Fibre Channel name resolution and connectivity
Use this procedure to test for Fibre Channel network connectivity and proper name
resolution. This procedure uses the Test button in the Configuration Manager Network
dialog box.
To verify name resolution and Fibre Channel connectivity:
1. Open Configuration Manager, then click Network.
2. Click the Test.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
301
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
3. In the Ping Window, select the Ping the Interface option.
4. Type fc0 in the text box, then click Ping. Make sure to enter a zero not an O. All
Profile systems connected to Fibre Channel are asked to respond.
Wait for ping results.
5. Check the Ping Results window, then do one of the following:
a. If only the local system responded, there is a problem with the Fibre Channel
network connectivity. Verify the Fibre Channel connections for all systems,
then review all configuration steps under “Setting up a simple video network:
Fibre Channel” on page 268. Repeat step 4. If there is still a problem, refer to the
Profile XP Service Manual.
b. If all systems responded, but a Profile system name is missing or incorrect, there
is an error in the HOSTS file. Refer to “Manually Edit the hosts file on each
Profile XP” on page 270.
NOTE: You can use the “Ping the Site” option to ping a specific Profile system
using it’s IP address or name, for example Profile1_fc0. Pinging by name requires
the HOSTS file to be correct. Pinging by IP address does not require the HOSTS
file.
302
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Common Ethernet video network problems
Common Ethernet video network problems
This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common Ethernet video
network problems. Search the table for the problem you are experiencing, then try the
corrective action. Some problems have more than one corrective action.
13 May 2005
Problem
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
Can’t transfer files in Media
Manager.
There may be an incorrect
network name entry in the
HOSTS file on the Profile XP
system.
Verify all Windows NT Ethernet and
video Ethernet entries in the HOSTS
all systems. Make sure video Ethernet
names use _le, that is, zero and not the
letter O. Refer to “Manually Edit the
hosts file on each Profile XP” on page
279.
Can’t transfer files in Media
Manager.
No video Ethernet connectivity.
Refer to “Testing the Ethernet Video
network” on page 304.
In Media Manager, files
transfer only one direction.
There may be an incorrect entry
in the HOSTS file on the
Profile XP systems.
Verify all Windows NT Ethernet and
video Ethernet entries in the HOSTS
file on both systems, refer to
“Manually Edit the hosts file on each
Profile XP” on page 279.
Media Manager can’t find a
Profile XP when you try to
add it to the network hosts list.
PortServer is not running on the
remote Profile XP system.
Start PortServer on the remote system,
refer to “Running PortServer to
enable remote operation” on page
251.
Media Manager can’t find the
Profile XP when you try to
add it to the network hosts list.
Unable to resolve Windows NT
Ethernet name. There may be an
incorrect Windows NT Ethernet
name entry in the HOSTS file.
Verify all Windows NT Ethernet and
video Ethernet entries in the HOSTS
file on both systems, refer to
“Manually Edit the hosts file on each
Profile XP” on page 279
Media Manager can’t find a
Profile XP when you try to
add it to the network hosts list.
No Windows NT Ethernet
connectivity.
Refer to “Testing the Ethernet Video
network” on page 304.
Profile XP System Guide
303
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
Testing the Ethernet Video network
Use this procedure to test your video network setup. Tests are included for the Windows
NT Ethernet and video Ethernet networks.
Testing the Windows NT Ethernet name resolution and connectivity
The video Ethernet video network relies on Windows NT Ethernet connectivity and
name resolution.This procedure uses the ping command which requests a response from
the named Profile XP system. If the remote system does not respond, you’ll try ping
using the IP address of the remote system. If the system responds, you have a name
resolution problem. If there is no response, refer to the Profile XP Service Manual for
help with solving problems with the Windows NT Ethernet adapter or cabling.
To test the Windows NT Ethernet network:
1. Open the Windows NT command prompt by selecting Start | Programs | Command
Prompt.
2. Type ping, then the Windows NT Ethernet name of one of the Profile XP systems
on the network, then press Enter. For Example:
ping Profile1
If this command returns:
Pinging Profile1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
You have successfully resolved the name Profile1 and you have Windows NT
Ethernet network connectivity.
If, however, the ping command returns:
Pinging Profile1 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
There is a connectivity problem or the Windows NT Ethernet IP address could not
resolve properly. Continue with step 3.
304
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Testing the Ethernet Video network
3. Type ping, then, this time, use the IP address of one of the Profile XP systems on
the network, then press Enter. For Example:
ping 192.168.99.100
If this command returns:
Pinging 192.168.99.100 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 192.168.99.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
You have connectivity to the network, so there must be a name resolution problem
for the IP address. You need to re-check your HOSTS file for accuracy. Refer to
“Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP” on page 279.
If, however, the ping command returns:
Pinging 192.168.99.100 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
One or both of the Profile XP systems appears to have a network connectivity
problem. Re-check the cabling and try again. If this does not solve the problem,
refer to the Profile XP Service Manual for more help with solving Windows NT
Ethernet network problems.
4. Repeat step 2 for all Profile XP systems on the network, then proceed with “Testing
video Ethernet name resolution and connectivity” on page 306.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
305
Chapter 12
Solving Common Setup Problems
Testing video Ethernet name resolution and connectivity
Use this procedure to test for video Ethernet network connectivity and proper name
resolution. This procedure uses the Test button in the Configuration Manager Network
dialog box.
To verify name resolution and video Ethernet network connectivity:
1. Open Configuration Manager, then click Network.
2. Click the Test.
306
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Testing the Ethernet Video network
3. In the Ping Window, select the Ping the Interface option.
4. Type le0 in the text box, then click Ping. Make sure to enter a zero not an O. All
Profile systems are asked to respond.
Wait for ping results.
5. Check the Ping Results window, then do one of the following:
a. If only the local system responded, there is a problem with the video Ethernet
network connectivity. Verify the video Ethernet connections for all systems,
then review all configuration steps under “Setting up a simple video network:
Ethernet” on page 277. Repeat step 4. If there is still a problem, refer to the
Profile XP Service Manual.
b. If all systems responded, but a Profile system name is missing or incorrect, there
is an error in the HOSTS file. Refer to “Manually Edit the hosts file on each
Profile XP” on page 279.
NOTE: You can use the “Ping the Site” option to ping a specific Profile system
using it’s IP address or name, for example Profile_le0. Pinging by name requires
the HOSTS file to be correct. Pinging the IP address does not require the HOSTS
file.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
307
Chapter 12
308
Solving Common Setup Problems
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Appendix
A
Electrical and Environmental
Specifications
General Information
This appendix provides tables of electrical specifications for the video and audio
characteristics, as well as environmental criteria and power characteristics. The tables in
this appendix make it easier to present the specifications in numerical values. The
following terms apply to the Profile XP Media Platform characteristics and descriptions
in the tables.
Specification: A document or a section of a document that lists and describes characteristics and
performance requirements of equipment and certain program material.
Requirement (Performance Requirement): A statement that defines a characteristic, usually
in limit form.
Supplemental Data: Statements that explain performance requirements or provide performance
information. These are not considered to be statements of guaranteed performance and
are not ordinarily supported by a performance check procedure.
Test Equipment
Grass Valley uses the following test equipment to verify the performance requirements
listed in this chapter.
• Tektronix VM700A
• Signal Source (Video and Audio)
• Signal Generator
• Monitor
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
309
Chapter A
Electrical Specifications
The Performance Requirements listed in the Electrical Specifications apply over an
ambient temperature range of +20.5 C to +30.5 C. The Performance Requirement
tolerances listed in the Electrical Specification are doubled over the temperature range
of 0 to +40.5 C, unless there is a specific exception.
Serial Digital Interface board (2In/2Out)
310
Characteristics
Description
Number of Inputs
Supplemental Data: Two component serial digital
Input Type
Supplemental Data: 75: terminated
Number of Outputs
Supplemental Data: Two component serial digital
Output Timing Range
Requirement:
-21/2 H to +148 H
Supplemental Data: Independent for each output
Supplemental Data: Resolution; 74 ns
Digital Format
Supplemental Data: CCIR 601 Component 525/625 10 bit data, Scrambled
NRZI; complies with SMPTE 259M and CCIR 656
Bit Rate
Supplemental Data: 270 Mb/s
Source Impedance
Supplemental Data: 75:
Return Loss
Supplemental Data: t15 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
DC Offset
Requirement:
0 r0.5V
Rise and Fall Times
Requirement:
400 - 1500ps; measured at the 20% and 80% amplitude
points
Jitter
Requirement:
d740 ps p-to-p
Input Level
Supplemental Data: 800 mV p-p r10%
Supplemental Data: Input voltages outside this range may cause reduced
receiver performance
Serial Receiver
Equalization Range
Requirement:
Proper operation with up to 17 dB loss at 135 MHz
using coaxial cable having 1/—F loss characteristics. 800
mV launch amplitude
Output Level
Requirement:
800 mV p-p r10%
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Electrical Specifications
Serial Digital Interface board (4 Out)
Characteristics
Description
Number of Outputs
Supplemental Data: Four component serial digital
Output Timing Range
Requirement:
-21/2 H to +148 H
Supplemental Data: Independent for each output
Supplemental Data: Resolution; 74 ns
Digital Format
Supplemental Data: CCIR 601 Component 525/625 10 bit data, Scrambled
NRZI; complies with SMPTE 259M and CCIR 656
Bit Rate
Supplemental Data: 270 Mb/s
Source Impedance
Supplemental Data: 75:
Return Loss
Supplemental Data: t15 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
DC Offset
Requirement:
0 r0.5V
Rise and Fall Times
Requirement:
400 - 1500ps; 20% to 80% amplitude slew rate
Jitter
Requirement:
d740ps pk-to-pk
Input Level
Supplemental Data: 800 mV p-p r10%
Supplemental Data: Input voltages outside this range may cause reduced
receiver performance
Output Level
Requirement:
800 mV p-p r10%
High Definition Serial Digital Interface board
13 May 2005
Characteristics
Description
Number of Inputs
Supplemental Data: One SMPTE 292M component serial digital
Input Type
Supplemental Data: 75: terminated
Number of Outputs
Supplemental Data: One SMPTE 292M component serial digital
One SMPTE 259M component serial digital
(down-converted HD)
One NTSC/PAL analog composite w/ time code burn-in
and text overlay (down-converted HD)
Output Timing Range
Requirement:
Digital Format
Supplemental Data: Complies with standards listed in SMPTE 292M,
Table1 (Source format parameters)
Bit Rate
Supplemental Data: 1485 Mb/s
Source Impedance
Supplemental Data: 75:
Return Loss
Supplemental Data: t15 dB from 5 MHz to 1500 MHz
DC Offset
Requirement:
0 r0.5V
Rise and Fall Times
Requirement:
No greater than 270ps and shall not differ by more than
100ps. measured at the 20% and 80% amplitude points
Jitter
Requirement:
d 134ps. As per SMPTE 292 Table 5
-21/2 H to +148 H
Profile XP System Guide
311
Chapter A
Characteristics
Description
Input Level
Supplemental Data: 800 mV p-p r10%
Supplemental Data: Input voltages outside this range may cause reduced
receiver performance
Serial Receiver
Equalization Range
Requirement:
Proper operation with up to 20 dB loss at 750 MHz
using coaxial cable having 1/—F loss characteristics. 800
mV launch amplitude
Output Level
Requirement:
800 mV p-p r10%
Video Monitor
a.
312
Characteristicsa
Description
Number of Outputs
Supplemental Data: Four composite outputs
Output Timing Range
Supplemental Data: No output timing adjustments
Composite Analog
Format
Supplemental Data: NTSC (with or without setup) or PAL
Source Impedance
Supplemental Data: 75:
DC Offset
Supplemental Data: 0 V
Output Level
Supplemental Data: 1 V p-p
The Video Monitor outputs are not broadcast quality. These outputs are for monitoring only.
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Electrical Specifications
Reference Genlock
Characteristics
Description
Color Field Detection, Based on
SCH Phase
Requirement:
Burst Frequency Lock Range
Requirement:
PAL,r10 Hz at subcarrier
NTSC, r20 Hz at subcarrier
Signal Amplitude Lock Range
Requirement:
Stays locked to +6 dB and -3 dB
Reference Genlock Input Return
Loss
Requirement:
t40 dB to 5 MHz
Unlocked 27Mhz. clock accuracy
Requirement:
When not locked to a reference black
27Mhz. will be within r 25PPM
Tri-level sync Lock Range
(high-definition)
Requirement:
Stays locked to +6 dB and -3 dB at nominal
r300 mV signal
Correct color framing for signals having an
average SCH phase r40q; Lockup r10q
Supplemental Data: Once locked to color field, it will stay locked
over a range of 0q to r90q
LTC Timecode
Characteristics
Description
Input
Supplemental Data: Longitudinal Time Code. AC coupled,
differential input
Input Impedance
Supplemental Data: 20 k:.
Input Amplitude
Supplemental Data: 0.1 V p-p, differential, minimum
Maximum Input Voltage
Supplemental Data: 2.5 V p-p, differential, maximum
GPI I/O
13 May 2005
Characteristics
Description
GPI Input
Supplemental Data: Inputs set to TTL level high.
Compatible with 5 volts CMOS/TTL open
collector or contact closures.
GPI Output
Supplemental Data: Outputs are open drain drivers.
Max. voltage when outputs are open = 30V
Max. current when outputs are
closed = 200ma.
Profile XP System Guide
313
Chapter A
Analog Audio
Characteristics
Description
Through Gain
Requirement:
1 r1 dB
Supplemental Data: Non-mix mode each of
four channels
Frequency Response
Requirement:
Input Impedance
Supplemental Data: 600 : or 20 k: each channel
Input/Output Signal Levels
Supplemental Data: Nominal Line Level: 0 dBu
Nominal Peak Line Level: +9 dBu
Digital Clipping: +18 dBu (16-bit
quantization)
THD+N at 1020 Hz and 60 Hz
Requirement:
20 Hz to 20 kHz, with between +0.5 dB, -2 dB
maximum deviation from flatness at 48 kHz
sample rate
-70 dBm (0.031%) at +9dBu input
Digital Audio
314
Characteristics
Description
Bit Rate
Supplemental Data: 270 Mb/S
Return Loss
Supplemental Data: 15 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
Input Impedance
Supplemental Data: 75 :
Output Amplitude
Requirement:
mV p-pr80 mV.
Output DC Level
Requirement:
0 V, r0.5 V
Output Rise and Fall Time
Requirement:
400 pS to 1000 pS between 20% and 80%
Jitter
Requirement:
d either 0.2ui or 720 pS p-p
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Power Specifications
Profile XP System Power Specifications
Profile XP system power specifications are shown in the following table.
a.
Characteristics
Safety Rating
Supplemental Data
Mains Voltage Steady
State Amplitude
100-240VRMS
87-264 VRMS
Mains Frequency
Range
60-50Hz
47-63Hz
Mains Steady State
Currenta
7A max @100 VRMS
3A max@240 VRMS
5A max @120 VRMS
Mains Inrush Currenta
70A @240 VRMS, max
35A @120 VRMS, max
Supply Type
Single Phase
Supply Connection
Detachable cord set
(IEC320 filtered inlet connector)
Efficiency
>70%
Power Output Rating
430 W maximum
Thermal Output
2100BTU/h max
(assuming max configuration)
Per power supply.
PAC 216 Power Requirements
The following table lists the power requirements for the PAC216 audio chassis.
13 May 2005
Characteristic
Specification
Voltages/current from power supply
+5V, 1.9 A maximum
Typical Total Power
9.0 Watts typical
Maximum Heat Dissipation
32.42 BTU/hour (9.5 watts)
Profile XP System Guide
315
Chapter A
Environmental Criteria
The following table lists the environmental criteria for the Profile XP Media Platform,
RAID storage Chassis, and the PAC216.
316
Characteristics
Description
Operating Temperature
Requirement:
10q to 40qC
Storage Temperature
Requirement:
-40q to 65qC
Operating Altitude
Requirement:
To 10,000 feet
Supplemental Data: IEC 950 compliant to 2000 meters
Storage Altitude
Requirement:
Mechanical Shock
Supplemental Data: Class 5 (30G) Grass Valley 001131500
Random Vibration
Requirement:
Requirement:
Operational: Class 6 Grass Valley 001131500
Non-Operational: Class 5 Grass Valley 001131500
Transportation
Requirement:
Grass Valley 001131500
Equipment Type
Supplemental Data: Information Technology
Equipment Class
Supplemental Data: Class 1
Installation Category
Requirement:
Category II Local level mains, appliances, portable
equipment, etc.
Pollution Degree
Requirement:
Level 2 operating environment, indoor use only.
Relative Humidity
Requirement:
Operating 80% from +30q to +40qC
Non-Operating 90% from +30q to +60qC
Do not operate with visible moisture on the circuit
boards
Profile XP System Guide
To 40,000 feet
13 May 2005
Appendix
B
Connector Pin-outs
This appendix contains the pin-outs for the connectors used in the Profile XP and I/O
Panel.
S-VGA connector
The Profile XP Media Platform S-VGA monitor connector is a high density15-pin
female connector.
1
6
11
5
10
15
Female
0624-35
Pin #
Signal
Pin #
Signal
Pin #
Signal
1
Analog Red Output
6
Ground
11
not used
2
Analog Green Output
7
Ground
12
not used
3
Analog Blue Output
8
Ground
13
Horizontal Sync
4
not used
9
Fused Vcc
14
Vertical Sync
5
Ground
10
Ground
15
not used
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
317
Chapter B
RJ-45 Ethernet connector
The Profile XP has a Ethernet connector for Windows NT networking and another
Ethernet connector on the optional Ethernet board for video networking. Both are 8-pin
RJ-45 snap-in telephone-type connectors. Use Category 5 unshielded twisted pair cable.
The pin-outs for both connectors are the same.
8
7
Pin 8
6
5
4
3
2
9676-18
1
Pin 1
318
Profile XP System Guide
Pin #
Signal
Pin #
Signal
1
Transmit +
5
not used
2
Transmit -
6
Receive -
3
Receive +
7
not used
4
not used
8
not used
13 May 2005
Parallel Port connector
Parallel Port connector
The parallel port uses a 25-pin female connector located on the rear panel of the
Profile XP Media Platform.
1
14
Female
25
13
0624-31
.
13 May 2005
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Strobe/
14
Auto Feed
2
Data bit (0)
15
Fault
3
Data bit (1)
16
Init
4
Data bit (2)
17
SLCT IN
5
Data bit (3)
18
Ground
6
Data bit (4)
19
Ground
7
Data bit (5)
20
Ground
8
Data bit (6)
21
Ground
9
Data bit (7)
22
Ground
10
ACK
23
Ground
11
Busy
24
Ground
12
Paper Error
25
Ground
13
Select
Profile XP System Guide
319
Chapter B
RS-232 connectors
The Profile XP Media Platform has one 9-pin male RS-232 interface connector on the
rear panel.
5
9
Male
6
1
0624-33
Pin #
320
Profile XP System Guide
Signal
Description
1
DCD
Received line Signal Detector
2
RXD
Received Data
3
TXD
Transmitted Data
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GND
Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
RTS
Request To Send
8
CTS
Clear To Send
9
CE
Ring Detect
13 May 2005
I/O Panel RS-422 connectors
I/O Panel RS-422 connectors
The Profile XP I/O Panel has eight 9-pin female connectors for RS-422 connections.
5
1
Female
0624-34
9
13 May 2005
6
Pin #
Signal
Description
1
GND
Signal Ground
2
-TXD
Differential Transmit Data (low)
3
+RXD
Differential Receive Data (high)
4
GND
Signal Ground
5
NC
6
GND
Signal Ground
7
+TXD
Differential Transmit Data (high)
8
-RXD
Differential Receive Data (low)
9
GND
Signal Ground
Profile XP System Guide
321
Chapter B
I/O Panel GPI connectors
The Profile XP Media Platform has two 25 pin female connectors mounted on the
I/O Panel for General Purpose Interface (GPI) input and output connections.
GPI Input connector (on I/O Panel)
13
Female
1
0624-32
25
Pin
322
Profile XP System Guide
14
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Signal Ground
14
GPI-In5
2
Signal Ground
15
Signal Ground
3
GPI-In1
16
Signal Ground
4
Signal Ground
17
GPI-In6
5
Signal Ground
18
Signal Ground
6
GPI-In2
19
Signal Ground
7
Signal Ground
20
GPI-In7
8
Signal Ground
21
Signal Ground
9
GPI-In3
22
Signal Ground
10
Signal Ground
23
GPI-In8
11
Signal Ground
24
Signal Ground
12
GPI-In4
25
Signal Ground
13
Signal Ground
13 May 2005
GPI output connector (on I/O Panel)
GPI output connector (on I/O Panel)
13
Female
1
0624-32
25
Pin
13 May 2005
14
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Signal Ground
14
GPI-In5
2
Signal Ground
15
Signal Ground
3
GPI-Out1
16
Signal Ground
4
Signal Ground
17
GPI-Out6
5
Signal Ground
18
Signal Ground
6
GPI-Out2
19
Signal Ground
7
Signal Ground
20
GPI-Out7
8
Signal Ground
21
Signal Ground
9
GPI-Out3
22
Signal Ground
10
Signal Ground
23
GPI-Out8
11
Signal Ground
24
Signal Ground
12
GPI-Out4
25
Signal Ground
13
Signal Ground
Profile XP System Guide
323
Chapter B
I/O Panel LTC connectors
The I/O Panel provides four female XLR connectors for LTC In and four male XLR
connectors for LTC Out.
Push
LTC In
Connector
(female)
1
2
3
324
2
1
LTC Out
Connector
(male)
3
Pin #
LTC In
Pin #
LTC Out
1
Signal Ground
1
Signal Ground
2
(+)
2
(+)
3
(-)
3
(-)
Profile XP System Guide
0624-9
13 May 2005
Fibre Channel Disk board connectors
Fibre Channel Disk board connectors
The Fibre Channel Disk board has two connectors labeled Port A and Port B. Both
connectors have the same pin-out. The interconnect cable has a Amphenal Metagig
connector on one end and DB-9 on the other. Pinouts for both ends of the cable are
shown here along with the Fibre Channel cable specifications.
Metagig Connector PInouts
Pin #
Mnemonic
Description
1
TXP H
Differential Transmit Data (high)
2
GND
Signal Ground
3
TXN L
Differential Transmit Data (low)
4
NC
5
GND
Signal Ground
6
RXN L
Differential Receive Data (low)
7
Vcc
+5VDC
8
RXP H
Differential Receive Data (high)
9
GND
Signal Ground
10
GND
Signal Ground
Mnemonic
Description
1
TXP H
Differential Transmit Data (high)
2
Vcc
+5VDC
3
GND
Signal Ground
4
key
5
RXP H
Differential Receive Data (high)
6
TXN L
Differential Transmit Data (low)
7
GND
Signal Ground
8
GND
Signal Ground
9
RXN L
Differential Receive Data (low)
DB-9 Connector Pinouts
Pin #
Fibre Channel Cable Specifications
The Fibre Channel cable specifications are as follows:
Cable type:
Shielded, 75 ohm twin axial
Maximum length: 30 meters (98 feet) between PFC500 and Profile XP system;
< or = 10m (33 feet) unequalized; >10 m (33 feet) equalized
0.3 m (1 foot) min., 10m (33 feet) max. between PFC500 and PFC500E
Connector type:
13 May 2005
DB-9 on one end and Berg Metagig on the other.
Profile XP System Guide
325
Chapter B
Fibre Channel Network board connector
The Fibre Channel Network board has one fiber optic connector for connecting to Profile
video networks. Connector and cable specifications are shown here.
Connector type: SC Duplex
Cable type:
duplex zip cord, plenum grade
326
Profile XP System Guide
Fiber
Typical Length (meters)
50/125
300
62.5/125
500
13 May 2005
Audio board connector
Audio board connector
The Audio Board accepts 16 channels of digital audio input and provides 16 channels of
digital audio output via a 80-pin connector on the rear panel. The cable to this connector
is from the Profile Audio Chassis (PAC) or from the XLR/BNC 216 Digital Audio
Breakout Box.
1
41
Female
40
80
0624-36
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
327
Chapter B
Pin
Signal Description
Pin
Signal Description
Pin
Signal Description
1
Ch 1-2 AES Out (P)
28
nc
55
Ch 15-16 AES Out (P)
2
Ch 1-2 AES Out (N)
29
Ch 13-14 AES In (P)
56
Ch 15-16 AES Out (N)
3
Chassis Ground
30
Ch 13-14 AES In(N)
57
Ch 1-4 ADC Clock Out (P)
4
Chassis Ground
31
AES Reference In (P)
58
Ch 1-4 ADC Clock Out (N)
5
Ch 5-6 AES Out (P)
32
AES Reference In (N)
59
Ch 3-4 AES In (P)
6
Ch 5-6 AES Out (N)
33
AES Monitor Out (P)
60
Ch 3-4 AES In (N)
7
nc
34
AES Monitor Out (N)
61
Ch 5-8 ADC Clock Out (P)
8
nc
35
nc
62
Ch 5-8 ADC Clock Out (N)
9
Ch 9-10 AES Out (P)
36
nc
63
Ch 7-8 AES In (P)
10
Ch 9-10 AES Out (N)
37
UART Receive (P)
64
Ch 7-8 AES In (N)
11
nc
38
UART Receive (N)
65
Ch 9-12 ADC Clock Out (P)
12
nc
39
PAC Ready (P)
66
Ch 9-12 ADC Clock Out (N)
13
Ch 13-14 AES Out (P)
40
PAC Ready (N)
67
Ch 11-12 AES In (P)
14
Ch 13-14 AES Out (N)
41
nc
68
Ch 11-12 AES In (N)
15
nc
42
nc
69
Ch 13-16 ADC Clock Out (P)
16
nc
43
Ch 3-4 AES Out (P)
70
Ch 13-16 ADC Clock Out (N)
17
Ch 1-2 AES In (P)
44
Ch 3-4 AES Out (N)
71
Ch 15-16 AES In (P)
18
Ch 1-2 AES In (N)
45
nc
72
Ch 15-16 AES In (N)
19
nc
46
nc
73
Digital Ground
20
nc
47
Ch 7-8 AES Out (P)
74
Breakout Box Present Flag
21
Ch 5-6 AES In (P)
48
Ch 7-8 AES Out N)
75
UART Transmit (P)
22
Ch 5-6 AES In (N)
49
nc
76
UART Transmit (N)
23
nc
50
nc
77
Chassis Ground
24
nc
51
Ch 11-12 AES Out (P)
78
Chassis Ground
25
Ch 9-10 AES In (P)
52
Ch 11-12 AES Out (N)
79
PAC Reset (P)
26
Ch 9-10 AES In (N)
53
nc
80
PAC Reset (N)
27
nc
54
nc
nc = no connection
328
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Appendix
C
Rack Mounting Information and
Rear Panel Drawings
Rack mounting the Profile XP
The equipment for the Profile XP system installs in a standard 19-inch equipment rack.
Rack slide tracks shipped with the Profile XP system and peripheral products allow them
to slide in and out without having to remove them from the rack. If the rack does not
already have rack slides installed, or if the slides are not correctly positioned, you will
have to use those shipped with the Profile XP.
When planning the placement of equipment in your equipment rack, bear in mind the
following:
• The Profile XP requires six inches (15.25 cm) of clearance behind the rear panel
for to allow room for connectors and cable bends.
• Insure adequate air flow around the chassis to provide sufficient cooling.
(Operating ambient temperature will affect the amount of air circulation
required to keep the Profile XP within its temperature limitations.)
• Insure the rack is anchored to the floor so that it cannot tip over when the
Profile XP is extended out of the rack.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
329
Chapter C
Chassis dimensions for Profile XP and peripheral equipment
Use the following chassis dimension information when planning the placement of
equipment in your equipment rack.
a.
330
Item
Chassis Dimensions
Profile XP
Height: 10.45 in (26.54 cm)
Width: 19 in (48.26 cm)
Depth: 23.80 in (60.45 cm) from front rack ears to the rear panel
27.00 in (60.58 cm) from front of bezel to rear panel
PFC500 and
PFC500E
Height: 6.07 in (5.41 cm)
Width: 17.5 in (44.5 cm)
Depth: 24.91 in (63.27 cm) front door to back of drive fan pack
23.79 in (60.43cm) chassis front to back of drive fan pack
22.54 in (57.25 cm) rail front to back of drive fan pack
PFR500
Refer to the PFR500 Instruction Manual.
PFR600
Refer to the PFR600 Instruction Manual.
PAC216
Height: 3.50 inches (8.89 centimeters)
Width: 19.00 inches (48.26 centimeters)
Depth: 19.00 inches (48.26 centimeters)
PACXLR Panela
Height: 3.50 inches (8.89 centimeters)
Width: 19.00 inches (48.26 centimeters)
Depth: 3.25 inches (8.26 centimeters)
XLR216 Panela
Height: 3.50 inches (8.89 centimeters)
Width: 19.00 inches (48.26 centimeters)
Depth: 3.25 inches (8.26 centimeters)
BNC216 Panela
Height: 1.75 inches (4.45 centimeters)
Width: 19.00 inches (48.26 centimeters)
Depth: 3.25 inches (8.26 centimeters)
I/O Panela
Height: 1.75 inches (4.45 centimeters)
Width: 19.00 inches (48.26 centimeters)
Depth: 2.00 inches (5.08 centimeters)
These chassis are mounted in the rear of the rack.
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Rack mount hardware shipped with the Profile XP system
Rack mount hardware shipped with the Profile XP system
Your Profile XP comes with rack mounting hardware as shown. The Profile XP and
PAC216 are shipped with the chassis sections already attached.
10-32 PHS
Automatic
Chassis section pre-installed
Flat
Nut
Rear
Stationary
Rack
Section
Flat Nut Bar
10-32 PHS
Stop Latch
Intermediate
NOTE: Right-hand and left-hand stationary section is designated by the
RH and the LH marked on the rails. Stop latch holes should be towards
Rack mounting Fibre Channel RAID systems
To rack mount these storage systems, refer to the rack mounting information in the
PFC500, PFR500, or PFR600 Instruction Manuals.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
331
Chapter C
Mounting the Rack Slides
Choose the proper set of rail mounting holes on the rack. Notice that the hole spacing
can vary with the rack type. When mounting the slides in racks with EIA spacing, make
sure that the slides are attached to the 0.5-inch spaced holes.
“UNIVERSAL” SPACING
MIL STD 189
1.250 in
1.250 in
0.500 in
0.625 in
1.250 in
0.625 in
332
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Mounting the Rack Slides
Front and rear rack rail mounting hardware is provided with the rack mount kit. Mount
the rails using the enclosed hardware. Make sure the stationary sections are horizontally
aligned and are level, as well as parallel to each other.
BAR NUT
(Use if the front rail is not tapped)
FRONT RACK RAIL
BAR NUT
PNH
REAR RACK RAIL
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
333
Chapter C
Installing the Profile XP on the rack mount rails
To install the Profile XP on the rack mount rails:
1. Pull the slide-out track section to the fully extended position.
!
WARNING: To prevent injury, two people are required to lift the Profile XP. It is
too heavy for one person to install in the rack.
!
WARNING: To prevent serious injury, insure that the rack is anchored to the floor
so that it cannot tip over when the Profile XP is extended out of the rack.
2. Insert the ends of the chassis sections into the slide-out sections.
3. Push the chassis toward the rack until the chassis sections lock into the intermediate
sections.
4. Press the stop latches in the intermediate sections and push the chassis toward the
rack until the latches snap into their holes.
Stop Latch
5. Again, press the stop latches and push the cabinet fully into the rack.
6. Insert and tighten the front panel retaining screws.
Making Rack Slide Adjustments
After installation, binding may occur if the slide tracks are not properly adjusted. To
adjust the tracks:
1. Slide the chassis out approximately 10 inches.
2. Slightly loosen the mounting screws holding the tracks to the front of the rails and
allow the tracks to seek an unbound position.
3. Tighten the mounting screws and check the tracks for smooth operation by sliding
the chassis in and out of the rack several times.
4. Tighten the front panel retaining screws once the cabinet is in place within the rack
to complete the installation.
334
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Mounting Panels and Audio Chassis
Mounting Panels and Audio Chassis
Refer to the information that follows when mounting panels and the Profile XP audio
chassis:
• The I/O Panel is 1 RU high with the mounting holes spaced 1.250 inches
(3.175 cm) apart.
• The XLR216 is 2 RUs high with holes spaced 3.000 inches (7.62 cm) apart.
• The BNC216 is 1 RU high with the mounting holes spaced 1.250 inches
(3.175 cm) apart.
• The PAC216 audio chassis is 2 RU high with holes spaced 3.00 inches (7.62 cm)
apart.
The I/O Panel, XLR216 and BNC216 panels mount at the back of the rack with four pan
head screws. Ensure that there is room to make cable connections and mount in any order
which allows connection to the Profile XP system.
13 May 2005
Profile XP System Guide
335
Chapter C
Rear Panel Drawings
Profile XP Media Platform Chassis
FC Disk (Port A)
Profile XP Media Platform
Monitor
Parallel Port
Com1 (RS-232)
Power Cord
Power
Good LED
Ethernet
(Windows NT
Network)
Reference In
(Loop-Thru)
Optional
Power
Supply
Mouse
Keyboard
RS-422
Breakout
Audio
Audio
Channels Channels
1-16 (opt.)
1-16
FC Disk LTC/ Video
(Port B) GPI network (opt.)
Video I/O,
VideoOut, or
Video Monitor
8112-1
XLR216 and BNC216 AES/EBU Breakout Panels
Digital (AES/EBU)
Connector 1
Push
1-16
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
AES AES/EBU
Ref Monitor
Spares
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
In
Out
PAC
Breakout
XLR216 (rear mounted)
Digital (AES/EBU)
1-16
Connector 1/2
1/2 1/2
0624-8
336
Profile XP System Guide
...
Audio I/O
AES
Ref
Mon
Out
BNC216 (rear mounted)
In Out
13 May 2005
PAC216 Profile Audio Chassis
PAC216 Profile Audio Chassis
Digital Connector 9
Analog
Analog Connector 1
Push
Digital (AES/EBU) AES
Ref Monitor
9-16
1-8
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
In
Out
PAC216
Main
Audio I/O
PAC
Breakout
Digital Connector 1
Analog Connector 9
Push
Push
Push
Analog
Digital (AES/EBU)
9-16
1-8
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
Spares
Push
Push
Push
Push
In
Out
Audio I/O
PACXLR (rear mounted)
0624-7
I/O Panel
I/O Panel
Push
Push
Push
Push
0624-3
LTC In/Out
13 May 2005
GPI In/Out
RS-422
Profile XP System Guide
337
Chapter C
PFC500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis
PFC500 (Fibre Channel RAID Chassis)
Exp. Out
Port B
Port A
Serial
Port
Redundant RAID Controller (Optional)
0624-2
PFC500E Expansion Chassis
PFC500E (Epansion Chassis)
Exp. Out
Exp. In
Redundant Link Controller
338
Profile XP System Guide
0624-15
13 May 2005
PFR 500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis
PFR500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis
Host Fibre
Channel Port
7 Segment LED
(displays chassis address)
Fibre
Channel
Loop Port
Serial
Port
Ethernet
Port
RAID Controller B
RAID Controller A
PFR500
8136-1
Fibre
Channel
Loop Port
Ethernet
Port
Serial
Host Fibre
Port Channel Port
7 Segment LED
(displays chassis address)
PFR500E Expansion Chassis
7 Segment LED
(displays chassis address)
Left
Fibre Channel
Loop Port
Serial
Port
Ethernet
Port
Right
Fibre Channel
Loop Port
Loop Bypass Board B
Loop Bypass Board A
PFR500E
13 May 2005
8136-2
Serial
Left
Ethernet
Right
Port
Fibre Channel
Port
Fibre Channel
Loop Port
Loop Port
7 Segment LED
(displays chassis address)
Profile XP System Guide
339
Chapter C
PFR600 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis
7 Segment LED
(displays chassis address)
Serial
Port
Host Fibre
Channel Port
Ethernet
Port
Fibre
Channel
Loop Port
RAID Controller B
RAID Controller A
PFR600
Fibre
Channel
Loop Port
Ethernet
Port
Serial
Port
Host Fibre
Channel Port
7 Segment LED
(displays chassis address)
PFR600E Expansion Chassis
Left
Fibre Channel
Loop Port
7 Segment LED
(displays chassis address)
Serial
Port
Ethernet
Port
Right
Fibre Channel
Loop Port
Loop Bypass Board B
Loop Bypass Board A
PFR600E
340
Profile XP System Guide
Left
Fibre Channel
Loop Port
Ethernet
Port
Serial
Port
7 Segment LED
(displays chassis address)
Right
Fibre Channel
Loop Port
13 May 2005
PFR 700 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis
PFR700 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis
RAID Controller 1
PC
DE
LINK
RAID Controller 0
HOST
DISK LINK
HOST ID
LINK
PC
PC
DE-DIAG
DE
LINK
HOST
DISK LINK
HOST ID
LINK
PC
DE-DIAG
READY
2G
2G
MATE
LINK
READY
2G
READY
ACCESS
BACKUP
FAULT
2G
MATE
LINK
READY
ACCESS
BACKUP
FAULT
GOOD FLT
PWR
100 240V
AC 100—240V
GOOD FLT
PWR
100 240V
AC 100—240V
0
UPS
1
A1
A1
SDN
FLT
RDY
SDN
LNK
LAN Ethernet Port
Card
Expansion Host Fibre Status Serial Expansion chassis
Port diagnostic connector
Chassis Channel Port LEDs
Port
PFR700E Expansion Chassis
Expansion Adapter 1
FC–OUT
Expansion Adapter 0
FC–OUT
FC–IN
ENC ID
FC–IN
DIAG RDY
DIAG RDY
RDY FLT
RDY FLT
ENC ID
DIAG ID
PORT1
DE—DIAG
GOOD FLT
PWR
100 240V
AC 100—240V
13 May 2005
PORT0
GOOD FLT
PWR
100 240V
AC 100—240V
A1
Chassis
address
switch
DIAG ID
PORT1
DE—DIAG
PORT0
Expansion chassis Status RAID
diagnostic address LEDs chassis
switch
Port
A1
Expansion chassis
diagnostic connector
Profile XP System Guide
341
Chapter C
342
Profile XP System Guide
13 May 2005
Index
A
AC-3 202
accessories 33
adding channels 126
AES/EBU audio I/O
input status, checking 201
selecting 197
AES/EBU Breakout Panels
BNC216 192
XLR216 192
Agile Output
licensing 237
AMP 252
analog audio
input level adjustment 205
output level adjustment 206
output line mode, selecting 208
output muting 207
analog audio, selecting 197
ancillary data
about 231, 242
adding/removing tracks 232
removing a data track 235
selecting video I/Os used 233
Applications Subsystem 34, 39
asynchronous feeds, recording 150
audio
16 bit 202
24 bit 202
about 191
analog audio line mode, selecting 208
analog input level, adjusting 205
analog output level, adjusting 206
coding format
about 202
selecting 202
common setup problems 290
delay, adjusting
using custom settings 204
using presets 203
I/O formats available 192
13 May 2005
I/O formats, selecting 197
interface chassis 192
muting, analog output 207
number of channels 191
output format,selecting 199
reference level, selecting 209
shuttle mode, how audio sounds 210
tracks
adding or removing 193
Audio board
description 41
Audio board connector 327
audio channels
selecting 139
audio hardware settings
setting the audio window size 210
shuttle mode 210
audio I/O
see audio
audio tracks
audio channels, selecting 193, 196
audio window size, setting 210
audio, Overload clipping 205
automatic logon 44, 45
B
binding disks 72, 77
block diagram, board level 35
BNC216 AES/EBU Breakout Panel 192
rear panel drawing 336
board location 56
browse video
defining custom presets 162
enabling 132
selecting quality 160
BVW protocol 246
C
Canadian Certified AC Adapter 17
Canadian Certified Power Cords 17
Canadian EMC Notice of Compliance 17
certification 18
Channel Configuration
Warning symbol 124
Channel Configuration dialog box
Profile XP System Guide
343
Index
(in use), resources shown 122
dimmed text 122
red text 122
channels
about channels 119
adding 126
adding/removing ancillary data 232
audio channel pairs, selecting 139
audio tracks, adding or removing 193
default settings 26
default settings for channels you add 121
description text box 126
importing and exporting settings 59
maximum number of 70, 121
multiple video tracks, adding 188
removing 141
renaming 126
restoring channel settings 57, 58
saving channel settings 57
selecting video I/Os 155
summary dialog box 125
timecode I/O
internal generators, selecting 212
LTC selecting 228
VITC input, selecting 217
VITC output, selecting 223
type, selecting 128
video quality, selecting 130, 136
VITC generator setup 225
VITC input, selecting 217
working with 121
channels settings
saving and restoring 57
chassis dimensions
peripheral equipment 330
Profile XP 330
chrominance sampling method 156
chrominance sampling method, guidelines for
selecting 157
clip
editing In/Out points 255
clipping, audio 205
common setup problems
audio 290
channel control problems 296
344
Profile XP System Guide
Ethernet video network 303
Fibre Channel network 298
playing/recording 288
timecode 292
using Configuration Manager 295
video 289
Windows NT network 297
Configuration Manager
common setup problems 295
remote configuration 62
tour of 48
configuring storage, see Fibre Channel RAID
Chassis
connector pin-outs
Audio board
connector 327
Ethernet connector 318
Fibre Channel disk connector 325
Fibre Channel network connector 326
GPI connector pinouts 322
LTC connector, I/O Panel 324
Parallel Port connector 319
RS-232 connector 320
RS-422 connector, I/O Panel 321
S-VGA connector 317
creating new channels 126
creating video file system 72, 77
crosspoints, video renaming 181, 182
D
data rate,
see video quality
delay, in E to E 143
description, channel 126
dimmed text, resources displayed in 122
disk firmware
downloading, PFR500 101
downloading, PFR600 107
downloading, PFR700 113
disk rebuild
forcing rebuild, PFR500 103
starting rebuild PFR600 108
Disk Utility 71, 100, 107, 113
Dolby D 202
drop-frame timecode, timecode generator
13 May 2005
Index
setting 216
Dupli-disk
controls and indicators 31
DVCPRO 25 27
DVCPRO 50 27
E
E to E delay 143
E to E timed mode 143, 146
editing a clip 255
electrical specifications 310
analog audio 314
digital audio 314
GPI I/O 313
LTC I/O 313
PAC216 power requirements 315
Profile XP power specifications 315
Reference Genlock 313
Serial Digital I/O 310
Serial Digital Output 311
Video Monitor 312
embedded audio I/O
input status 168
selecting 197
EN55022 Class A Warning 17
environmental criteria 316
Error Detection Handling (EDH),
removing 180
Ethernet
hubs and switches 259, 261, 266, 267
Ethernet connector 318
Ethernet switch 282
Ethernet video network
cabling, connecting 281
common setup problems 303
entering network settings 277
HOSTS file, editing 279
installing 277
testing, using Media Manager 282
expanding storage 73, 87
exporting
channel settings 59
hardware settings 59
13 May 2005
F
failover, RAID Controller 66
FCC Emission Control 17
FCC Emission Limits 18
Fiber Channel video network
common setup problems 298
Fibre Channel Disk board, description 42
Fibre Channel disk cable specifications
Fibre Channel disk cable 325
Fibre Channel network cable
specifications 326
Fibre Channel RAID Chassis 42
about configuring storage 72
configuring storage 71, 100, 107, 113
configuring to include hot spare drives 83
configuring without hot spares drives 77
controller settings
PFR500 104
PFR600 109
disk initialization
PFR500 104
PFR600 109
disk settings, PFR500 106
expanding storage 73, 87
forcing disk rebuild, PFR500 103
hot spare drives 73
starting disk rebuild, PFR600 108
storage capacity 69
Fibre Channel switch 259, 273
Fibre Channel video network
available bandwidth 70
cabling, connecting 272
entering network settings 269
HOSTS file, editing 270
installing 268
IP address, choosing 260
machine name, choosing 260
testing with Media Manager 273
troubleshooting 299
Fixed Start Time, timecode generator
setting 215
forcing disk rebuild 103
front panel description 29, 30, 31
Profile XP System Guide
345
Index
G
general information, specifications 309
General Purpose Interface (GPI) 245
General Safety Summary 15
GoP 156, 157
GPI connector pin-outs 322
GPI trigger 245
H
hardware settings
importing and exporting 59
restoring 58
saving 57
high level block diagram 34
horizontal blanking, erasing 180
hot spare drives 73, 83
I
I,B,and P frames 157
I/O Panel
rear panel drawing 337
importing
channel settings 59
hardware settings 59
injury precautions 15
interlaced mode 167
internal timecode generator settings 215
Introduction 19
IP address
Ethernet video network 262
Fibre Channel video network 260
NT Ethernet network 265
L
Laser Compliance 18
FCC Emission Limits 18
Laser Safety 18
Laser Safety Requirements 18
Laser Safety 18
Laser Safety Requirements 18
license
adding 242
346
Profile XP System Guide
Agile Output 237
archiving 243
deleting 243
requesting 238
License Manager,
SabreTooth 242
line double 167
logging on 44
automatic logon 44
logon as Administrator 44
logon as Profile user 45
LTC
selecting 228
LTC connector, I/O Panel 324
LUNs
about 72
forcing online 103
offline 103
unbinding 72
M
Media Manager 282
testing Fibre Channel video network 273
testing the Ethernet Video network 282
MPEG D10 27
MPEG-2 27
muting, analog output 207
N
network
about Profile networking 257
about transfers 28
both video network options installed 263
Ethernet video network
about 261
cabling, connecting 281
entering network settings 277
HOSTS file, editing 279
installing 277
IP address, choosing 262
machine name 262
13 May 2005
Index
Fibre Channel video network
about 258
cabling 272
entering network settings 269
HOSTS file, editing 270
installing 268
IP address, choosing 260
machine name, choosing 260
testing with Media Manager 273
troubleshooting 299
Ping Window
testing Ethernet video network 307
testing the Fibre Channel network 302
simple networks, about 263
Windows NT network
about 257
cabling 266
common setup problems 297
installing 264
IP address, choosing 264
machine name 264
O
Odetics Protocol 252
Odetics protocol 246
P
PAC216 Audio Chassis
about 192
power requirements 315
rear panel drawing 337
parallel connector, pinouts 319
PFC500
setting system clock 117
PFC500, PFR500, PFR600, or PFR700, see
Fibre Channel RAID Chassis
PFC500
rear panel drawing 338
PFC500E Expansion chassis
rear panel drawing 338
PFR500
controller settings 104
disk initialization 104
disk settings 106
downloading disk firmware 101
13 May 2005
forcing disk rebuild 103
rear panel drawing 339
PFR500E Expansion chassis
rear panel drawing 339
PFR600
controller settings 109
disk firmware downloading 107
disk initialization 109
rear panel drawing 340
replacing failed disk 108
PFR600E Expansion chassis
rear panel drawing 340
PFR700
downloading disk firmware 113
rear panel drawing 341
replacing failed disk 114
PFR700E Expansion chassis
rear panel drawing 341
Player
editing mark points 255
loading clips 256
player channels, about 128
player/recorder channels, about 128
playing
common setup problems 288
PortServer 251
common setup problems 296
power specifications 315
product damage precautions 16
Profile protocol 249
Profile XP
logging on Windows NT 44
rear panel drawing 336
starting the system 43
system overview 34
Prolink 249
window, described 250
protocol monitor 255
R
rack mounting
audio chassis 335
chassis dimensions 330
I/O Panel 335
Profile XP system 329, 334
Profile XP System Guide
347
Index
rack slide adjustments 334
RAID-3 LUNs 72
Real Time Subsystem 40
Real Time System 34
rear panel drawing
I/O Panel 337
PAC216 Audio Chassis 337
PFC500 338
PFC500E Expansion chassis 338
PFR500 339
PFR500E Expansion chassis 339
PFR600 340
PFR600E Expansion chassis 340
PFR700 341
PFR700E Expansion chassis 341
Profile XP chassis 336
XLR216 & BNC216 Breakout panels 336
rear panel view 32
recorder channels, about 128
recording, common setup problems 288
red text, resources displayed in 122
redundant RAID controller 66
redundant system disk 31
reference input 221
VITC reader 221
reference input, system 148
reference input, VITC reader setup 221
reference level, audio 209
remote applications 251
remote control
control mode, selecting 252
control port, selecting 252
current and preview clip 252
Ethernet 245, 251
Prolink, using 245, 249
RS-422 protocols 245
BVW 246
Odetics 246
Profile protocol 249
VDCP 246
removing channels 141
renaming channels 126
renaming video inputs 181
renaming video outputs 182
replacing failed disk
348
Profile XP System Guide
PFR600 108
PFR700 114
resource conflicts 124
restoring
channels settings 57
hardware settings 57
system settings 57
RS232 connector pinouts 320
RS-422
BVW protocol 246
Odetics protocol 246
Profile protocol 249
remote control protocols 245
VDCP 246
RS-422 board, description 39
RS-422 connector, I/O Panel
connector pin-outs 321
S
SabreTooth
License Manager 242
safety terms and symbols 16
saving
channel settings 57
hardware settings 57
system settings 57
selecting
timecode I/O 140
selecting browse video quality 160
selecting channel type 128
setup, on video monitor 184
SFP 42
shutdown (turning power off) 46
signal loss
video input 173
video output 179
specifications 309
electrical 310
environmental 316
Fibre Channel disk cable 325
standard accessories 33
still-play mode 167
Storage
common setup problems 294
storage capacity 69
13 May 2005
Index
Summary dialog box 125
summary dialog boxes
about 54
show or hide 55
support, Grass Valley 13
S-VGA connector 317
switch, Fibre Channel 259
switching between video inputs and decoder
outputs 143
system bandwidth 70
system clock, PFC500 117
system reference offset, adjusting 148
system settings
importing and exporting 59
restoring 58
restoring defaults 57
saving 57
saving and restoring 57
T
test equipment 309
text overlay, on video monitor 185
timecode
about 211
common setup problems 292
internal generators, selecting 212
timecode generators, settings 215
timecode burn-in, video monitor 186
timing,
see video input timing and video output
timing
Tool Tips 123
trimming a clip 255
troubleshooting
Ethernet video network 304
Fibre Channel video network setup
problems 299
U
unbinding LUNs 72
uncompressed VBI information 163
V
VBI
blanking lines on video input 171
13 May 2005
erasing lines on video output 176, 177
recording lines uncompressed 163
VDCP control 246
video data rate, maximum 70
video file system
about 72
volume name 73
volume name, changing 85
video input
erasing VBI lines 171
input signal status 168
loss of signal 173
modifying hardware settings 169
timing
timing asynchronous feeds 150
VITC
reader setup 169
video monitor 183
enabling dither 183
NTSC pedestal 184
text overlay, enabling 185
timecode burn-in 186
time-code burn-in, selecting a timecode
source 229
video output
crosspoints 155
erasing VBI lines 176, 177
modifying settings 174
removing ancillary data 180
signal loss 179
timing 143
E to E timed mode 146
system reference, adjusting 148
zero timed mode 144
VITC generator setup 174
video output timing, adjusting 143, 146
video quality 156
defining custom presets 162
presets, guidelines for selecting 156
see also storage capacity
selecting 130, 136, 158, 189
selecting for browse video 156
VBI uncompressed 163
video compression 27
video standard, changing 151
Profile XP System Guide
349
Index
video tracks, adding 188
video, common setup problems 289
viewing
board location information 56
board status 56
channel summary dialog box 125
hardware settings summary 54
hardware version numbers 56
VITC
common setup problems 292
deleting unwanted VITC signals 226
generating VITC on a video output 223
350
Profile XP System Guide
generator setup 174, 225
input status 168
reader setup 169, 221
recording 217
volume name, changing 85
X
XLR216 audio breakout box 192
rear panel drawing 336
Z
Zero timed mode 143
13 May 2005